Japan Radio JSS-2250 Marine MF/HF GMDSS Radio Transceiver, digital selective calling (DSC) / narrow-band direct printing (NBDP) Modem User Manual

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	2169640
Application ID	/X6J1Yw6tQ4+N/nMCMZ6Tg==
Document Description	User Manual
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	476.71kB (5958872 bits)
Date Submitted	2014-01-17 00:00:00
Date Available	2014-07-16 00:00:00
Creation Date	2013-07-16 12:06:51
Producing Software	Acrobat Distiller 7.0 (Windows)
Document Lastmod	2013-07-17 20:27:04
Document Title	Microsoft Word - JSS-2250n2500AP取説E_0.doc
Document Creator	PScript5.dll Version 5.2
Document Author:	j08088

MF/HF RADIO EQUIPMENT
Instruction Manual
7ZPJD0622
.
CAUTIONS AGAINST HIGH VOLTAGE
Radio and radar devices are operated by high voltages of anywhere from a few hundred volts up to
many hundreds of thousands of volts. Although there is no danger with normal use, it is very
dangerous if contact is made with the internal parts of these devices. (Only specialists should attempt
any maintenance, checking or adjusting.)
There is a very high risk of death by even a few thousand volts, in some cases you can be fatally
electrocuted by just a few hundred volts. To prevent accidents, you should avoid contact with the
internal parts of these devices at all costs. If contact is inevitable as in the case of an emergency, you
must switch off the devices and ground a terminal in order to discharge the capacitors. After making
certain that all the electricity is discharged, only then can you insert your hand into the device. Wearing
cotton gloves and putting your left hand in your pocket, in order not to use both hands simultaneously,
are also very good methods of shock prevention.
Quite often, an injury occurs by secondary factors, therefore it is necessary to choose a sturdy and
level working surface. If someone is electrocuted it is necessary to thoroughly disinfect the affected
area and seek medical attention as soon as possible.
Cautions concerning treatment of
electrocution victims
When you find an electrocution victim, you must first switch off the machinery and ground all circuits. If
you are unable to cut off the machinery, move the victim away from it using a non-conductive material
such as dry boards or clothing.
When someone is electrocuted, and the electrical current reaches the breathing synapses of the
central nervous system inside the brain, breathing stops. If the victim's condition is stable, he or she
can be administered artificial respiration. An electrocution victim becomes very pale, and their pulse
can be very weak or even stop, consequently losing consciousness and becoming stiff.
Administration of first aid is critical in this situation.
First aid
☆Note points for first aid
Unless there is impending danger leave the victim where he or she is, then begin artificial respiration.
Once you begin artificial respiration, you must continue without losing rhythm.
(1) Make contact with the victim cautiously, there is a risk that you may get electrocuted.
(2) Switch off the machinery and then move the victim away slowly if you must.
(3) Inform someone immediately (a hospital or doctor, dial emergency numbers, etc.).
(4) Lay the victim on his or her back and loosen any constrictive clothing (a tie, or belt).
(5) (a) Check the victim's pulse.
(b) Check for a heartbeat by pressing your ear against the victim's chest.
(c) Check if the victim is breathing by putting the back of your hand or face near the victim's face.
(d) Check the pupils of the eyes.
(6) Open the victim's mouth and remove any artificial teeth, cigarette or chewing gum. Leave the
mouth opened and flatten the tongue with a towel or by putting something into the mouth to
prevent the victim's tongue from obstructing the throat. (If he or she is clenching the teeth and it is
difficult to open the mouth, use a spoon or the like to pry open the mouth.)
(7) Continually wipe the mouth to prevent the accumulation of saliva.
☆If the victim has a pulse but is not breathing
(“Mouth to mouth” resuscitation) Figure 1
(1) Place the victim’s head facing backward (place something under the neck like a pillow).
(2) Point the chin upward to widen the trachea.
(3) Pinch the victim’s nose, take a deep breath, then put your mouth over the victim’s mouth and
exhale completely, making sure that your mouth completely covers the victim’s mouth. Then
remove your mouth. Repeat this routine 10 to 15 times per minute (holding the nostrils).
(4) Pay attention to the victim to notice if he or she starts to breath. If breathing returns, stop
resuscitation.
(5) If it is impossible to open the victim’s mouth, put something like a plastic straw or vinyl tube into
one of the nostrils then blow air in while covering the mouth and the other nostril.
(6) Occasionally, when the victim comes back to consciousness, they immediately try to stand up.
Prevent this and keep them in a laying position. Give them something warm to drink and be sure
that they rest (do not give them any alcohol).
Administering artificial respiration by raising the head.
①
(1) Raise the back of head, then place one
hand on the forehead and place the other
hand under the neck. →①
Most victims open their mouth when this is
done, making “mouth to mouth”
resuscitation easier.
②
(2) Cover the victim’s mouth by opening your
mouth widely, then push your cheek
against the victim’s nose, →②
or pinch the victim’s nose to prevent air
from leaking out of it. →③
③
(3) Completely exhale into the lungs.
Exhale into the lungs until the chest
inflates.
You have to blow as rapidly as possible for
the first 10 times.
“Mouse to mouse” artificial respiration
Figure 1
☆If the victim has no pulse and is not breathing
(Heart massage in combination with artificial respiration.) Figure 2
If the victim has no pulse, his or her pupils are dilated, and if you cannot detect a heartbeat, the heart
may have stopped, beginning artificial respiration is critical.
(1) Put both hands on the diaphragm, with hands on top of each other keeping both arms straight (If
your elbows are bent, you cannot push with as much power). Press the diaphragm with your body
weight until the chest sinks about 2 cm (about 50 times per minute).
(2) If administering first aid when alone:
Perform the heart massage about 15 times then blow in twice. Repeat this routine.
If administering first aid with two people:
One person performs the heart massage 5 times, and the other person blows air in once. Repeat
this routine (Heart massage and “mouth to mouth” resuscitation used together).
(3) Constantly check the pupils and the pulse, if the pupils become normal and the pulse steadies,
keep them in a laying position and give them something warm to drink, be sure that they rest (do
not give them any alcohol). In any case you have to entrust major decision making to a doctor.
Having understanding people around is essential to the victim’s recovery from the mental shock of
electrocution.
①
②
③
④
(Heart massage in combination with artificial respiration.) Figure 2
Preface
Thank you for choosing the Model JRC JSS-2250/2500 (JSS-2250N/2500N) MF/HF radio equipment.
The radio equipment can be used as a Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS) radio
device, compliant with international regulations, that provides emergency communications and
standard communications capabilities for small and large ships.
●
●
Please read this instruction manual thoroughly before using the MF/HF radio equipment, and use
it in accordance with the instructions contained herein.
Please keep this manual available for future reference. Please refer to it if any difficulties are
encountered when using the equipment.
Before operation
Concerning the symbols
This manual uses the following symbols to explain correct operation and to prevent
injury or damage to property.
The symbols and descriptions are as follows. Understand them before proceeding with
this manual.
WARNING
Indicates a warning that, if ignored, may result in
serious injury or even death.
CAUTION
Indicates a caution that, if ignored, may result in
injury or damage to property.
Examples of symbols
The Δ symbol indicates caution (including DANGER and WARNING).
The illustration inside the Δ symbol specifies the content of the caution
more accurately. (This example warns of possible electrical shock.)
The ; symbol indicates that performing an action is prohibited. The
illustration inside the ; symbol specifies the contents of the prohibited
operation. (In this example disassembly is prohibited.)
The z symbol indicates operations that must be performed. The
illustration inside the z symbol specifies obligatory instructions. (In this
example unplugging is the obligatory instruction.)
Concerning the WARNING labels
The WARNING labels are put on the NTD-2250/2500 Transceiver, NBD-2250/2500
Power supply, NFC-2250/2500 Antenna tuner, and NBB-714/724 Battery charger.
Do not take off, destroy, or modify the labels.
NTD-2250/2500 Transceiver (Upper view)
vi
NBD-2250/2500 Power supply (Upper view)
NFC-2250/2500 Antenna tuner
NBB-714/724 Battery charger
vii
Handling precautions
WARNING
Do not open the equipment to inspect or repair internal circuits. Inspection or
repairs by anyone other than a specialized technician may result in fire, electrical
shock, or malfunction.
If internal inspection or repair is necessary, contact our service center or agents.
Do not disassemble or customize this unit.
Doing so may cause fire, electrical shock, or malfunction.
Do not get this equipment wet or spill any liquids on or near this equipment.
Doing so may cause electrical shock, or equipment malfunction.
Do not touch any of the areas with warning labels.
Doing so may cause electrical shock.
Do not use voltage other than that specified.
Doing so may cause fire, electrical shock, or malfunction.
Do not remove protective covers on the high voltage terminals.
Doing so may cause electrical shock.
Do not insert anything flammable into the equipment.
Doing so may cause fire, electrical shock, or malfunction.
If a distress alert is received, make sure to inform the ship's captain or officer in
charge.
Doing so may save the lives of the crews and passengers on the ship in distress.
This equipment is used for both distress communication and routine communication.
Contact JRC or our agent if any problem is observed in this unit during routine
operation or inspection.
viii
CAUTION
Do not use this equipment anyplace other than specified.
Doing so may cause failure or malfunction.
Do not turn the trimmer resistors or the trimmer capacitors on the PCB unit.
Doing so may cause failure or malfunction.
Do not install the equipment in a place near water or in one with excessive
humidity, steam, dust, or soot.
Doing so may cause fire, electrical shock, or malfunction.
Do not test the distress alert.
Doing so may inconvenience local shipping and rescue centers.
Do not turn off the equipment when at sea because the SOLAS Convention
requires keeping watch on distress and safety frequencies at all times. Always
listen to 2187.5 kHz, and 8414.5 kHz, and one or more of the following
frequencies; 4207.5 kHz, 6312.0 kHz, 12577.0 kHz, or 16804.5 kHz. In class B
mode, it is necessary to keep watch only on 2187.5 kHz.
When completely turning off the power to the equipment, turn off the breakers
on the power supply.
To operate DSC functions of the equipment, the ID numbers assigned to the ship
must be registered in advance. If registration is necessary, contact our service
center or agents.
To install this equipment, contact our service center or agents.
Special knowledge on selecting the place where the antenna is to be mounted
and setting the ID number (MMSI) assigned to the ship is required in addition to
installing the equipment.
When sending a distress alert, follow the instructions of the ship's captain or
officer in charge.
If a false distress alert is transmitted accidentally, select the Cancel menu and
transmit the distress cancel referring the guidance displayed on the controller. And
then report the false distress alert to a nearby RCC (Rescue Coordination Center/
in Japan, inform the nearest Japan Coast Guard.)
Information to be reported:
Ship's name, type, nationality, and ID number, the date/time, location and
reason why the false distress alert was transmitted. Also the unit model name
and manufacture number/date, if possible.
To turn off an alarm or clear a display such as a received DSC message, do not
press the DISTRESS key. Doing so may cause a false distress alert.
(Press the CANCEL key to turn off the alarm.)
When sending a drobose call, do NOT press the DISTRESS key. Doing so may
cause a false distress alert.
(Drobose calls can be sent via the [Call] button displayed on the screen.)
A distress acknowledgement or a distress relay call can be transmitted using the
option on an active procedure screen, but when sending such a call, follow the
instructions of the ship's captain or officer in charge.
ix
CAUTION
DSC messages with incorrect format or data may not be received, but it is not a
malfunction. Also if the data terminal is not connected, the equipment does not
receive DSC calls requesting ARQ/FEC communication, regardless of either the
category of routine, safety, urgency or distress.
Received distress message logs are automatically deleted after 48 hours to avoid
accidental resending or other misoperation. Accordingly, if such messages cannot
be read, it is not a malfunction.
The received distress message logs are cleared when turning off the power by
such as the breaker on the power supply. Due to the SOLAS Convention
(keeping watch on distress and safety frequencies at all times), do not turn off the
equipment when at sea.
The time in the 7.1 Date & time menu means the present time, and is different
from the time in the 7.2 POS/TIME menu that means the time when the position
information is valid.
The time in the 7.2 POS/TIME menu means the time when the position
information is valid, and is different from the present time mentioned in the 7.1
Date & time menu.
When replacing fuses, always use fuses of the same type.
The batteries, except for sealed lead-acid batteries that require no equalization,
should be carried out the equalizing charge at least every six months
The thermal head of the NKG-91 printer may be very hot after printing. Do not
touch the thermal head of the printer. Make sure the thermal head is cool before
replacing the paper or cleaning the thermal head.
The paper used in the NKG-91 printer is heat sensitive. Take the following
precautions when using this paper.
・ Store the paper away from heat, humidity, or heat sources.
・ Do not rub the paper with any hard objects.
・ Do not place the paper near organic solvents.
・ Do not allow the paper to come in contact with polyvinyl chloride film,
erasers, or adhesive tape for long periods of time.
・ Keep the paper away from freshly copied diazo type or wet process copy
paper.
The print head of the NKG-800 printer may be very hot after printing. Do not
touch the print head of the printer. Make sure the print head is cool before
replacing the paper or cleaning the print head.
Do not use the NKG-800 printer if there is no ink ribbon cartridge or paper. Do not
twist the ink ribbon when installing the ink ribbon cartridge.
Before opening and closing the cover of the NKG-800 printer, turn off the printer.
Wait more than 2 seconds after turning the printer off before turning it back on
again so it can initialize correctly.
Be sure to unmount the USB flash memory before removing it from the NDZ-227
Data terminal at work.
DISTRESS ALERTS
Sending a Distress Alert
CAUTION
When sending a distress alert, follow the instructions of the ship's captain or officer in
charge.
11.. Open the DISTRESS key cover on the NCM-2150 MF/HF CONTROLLER.
22.. Press and hold the DISTRESS key for 4 seconds to send the distress alert.
When the countdown is finished the screen below on the right is displayed, and after antenna
tuning the distress alerts are transmitted.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL ITU- 401
RX 4357.0 kHz
TX 4065.0
kHz
Distress call starts
SIG
in
sec
NonDST:
WKR scan bands: D R OB O S :
2 4 6 8 12 16MHz E d tD S T :
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
DSC Rx: 2187.5/Tx: 2187.5kHz
Distress calling
Next :--Stage :Waiting for CH free
Call-F: / / / / /
Nature:Undesignated
PosUTC: 89ﾟ59.0123'N
:179ﾟ59.6789'E @23:59
Mode :Radiotelephone
[Cancel]
SIG
WKR
2 4 6 8 12 16MHz
33.. After sending the distress alert, wait for an acknowledgement.
The radiotelephone can be used to communicate even while waiting for an acknowledgement on the screen
below left. When an acknowledgement is received, press the CANCEL key or ENT to cancel the alarm on the
below right screen, and communicate with the station. Unless an acknowledgement is received or the
distress alert is cancelled manually, the equipment repeats the distress alert every 3.5 to 4.5 minutes.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
TEL Rx: 8291.0/Tx: 8291.0kHz
Distress calling
Next :Resends 4.1min later
Stage :Waiting for ACK
Call-F:2/4/6/8/12/16
Nature:Undesignated
PosUTC: 89ﾟ59.0123'N
:179ﾟ59.6789'E @23:59
Mode :Radiotelephone
[FRQ][Pause][POS][CHNG][Cancel]
SIG
WKR 2 4 6 8 12 16MHz
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL
2182.0
2182.0
DST ALT
RxID:123456789|OWN D-ACK|2MHz
DIST acknowledged(00.2min)
T x : 2|4|6|8|12|16/ U n d e s i g n a t e d / T E L
89ﾟ59.0123'N179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
Press CANCEL to silence alarm.
xi
44.. After receiving acknowledgement, use the radiotelephone to request rescue.
First, the responding station calls by radiotelephone. Communicate the following information to that station.
z Say "MAYDAY".
z Say "This is (name of your ship)".
z Tell the station the ship's Maritime Mobile Service Identity (MMSI) number, call sign, ship's position,
nature of distress, and rescue requests.
Note
If time permits, enter the nature of the distress or the mode (Radiotelephone or FEC) as follows,
just before sending the distress alert. (For more details, see 4.5.5 Distress alerts.)
1)
2)
3)
4)
Open menu 3. Editing a distress msg.
Press ENT on the screen at right and select
the nature of the distress.
Press ENT to confirm the selection.
The nature of the distress is set. If the position
and time (UTC) are not displayed automatically
for any reason, input them manually at this time.
Press and hold the DISTRESS key for 4
seconds to send the distress alert.
The rest of the procedure is the same as
described above.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL Rx: 4146.0/Tx: 4146.0kHz
3)Editing a distress msg
:[Undesignated ]
Nature
Position
:[NE]
[ 89ﾟ59.0123'N]
[179ﾟ59.6789'E]
UTC of pos :[23:59]
Mode
:[Radiotelephone]
Attempt type:[Multi-FRQ ]
Tx bands
:[2/4/6/8/12/16]
[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]
Terminating a Distress Alert
CAUTION
If a false distress alert is transmitted accidentally, select the Cancel menu and transmit
the distress cancel referring the guidance displayed on the controller. And then report
the false distress alert to a nearby RCC (Rescue Coordination Center/ in Japan, inform
the nearest Japan Coast Guard.)
Information to be reported:
Ship's name, type, nationality, and ID number, the date/time, location and reason why
the false distress alert was transmitted. Also the unit model name and manufacture
number/date, if possible.
Select the Cancel menu and press ENT on the NCM-2150 MF/HF CONTROLLER.
The screen shown below is displayed. Then select Continue with the jog dial and press ENT to start the
distress cancel procedure referring the guidance displayed on the controller.
Note) For more details, see the description in the 4.5.5.1 Quick distress alerts.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
TEL Rx: 2182.0/Tx: 2182.0kHz
Distress calling
Next :Resends 3.2min later
Stage :Waiting for ACK
C a l l - F : 2 /! 4! /W 6a /r 8n /i 1n 2g /! 1! 6
Nature:Undesignated
P o s UC Ta Cn :c e 8l 9 ﾟt 5h 9e . 0t 1r 2a 3n 's Nm i t t e d
f a l :s 1e 7 9d ﾟi 5s 9t .r 6e 7s 8s 9 'a El e @r 2t 3? : 5 9
M o d e( T G :T R: a d2 i/ o4 t/ e6 l/ e8 p/ h1 o2 n/ e1 6 M )
[Continue] [Return]
[FRQ][Pause][POS][CHNG][Cancel]
SIG
WKR 2 4 6 8 12 16MHz
xii
Receiving a Distress Alert
WARNING
If a distress alert is received, make sure to inform the ship's captain or officer in charge.
Doing so may save the lives of the crew and passengers on the ship in distress.
11.. When a distress alert is received, the information such as the ID number of the ship in
distress and the stage of the distress event are displayed.
If the equipment is not used, i.e. there is no active procedure at that time, a distress and safety frequency is
set and the ALM lamp starts blinking, and an alarm gradually grows louder.
22.. Press the CANCEL key to stop the alarm. If the popup screen is shown, select "Accept"
and press ENT.
After the specified communicate mode and the distress frequency are set, keep watch under such a condition.
Keep watch for five minutes or more, and executes the report to the coast station etc. as appropriate
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL
TEL
2182.0
2182.0
S A M E D S T O N A N O T AH ERR: DFSRTQ A L T
From
:123456789
Work-F : 8291.0kHz
EQP will tune to the
above FRQ within 10s.
R x F R[ :A 1c 2c 3e 4p 5t 6] 7 8 9[ |I Dg In So Tr Re E] S S A L T
Waiting to send ACK(00.2min)
Single-FRQ: 2187.5kHz
TEL
:Rx 2182.0/Tx 2182.0kHz
[ACK][RLY][INF][FRQ][HLD][END]
8291.0
8291.0
DST ALT
RxID:123456789|DISTRESS ALT
Waiting to send ACK(00.6min)
Multi-FRQ:2/ / /8/ /16
TEL
:Rx 8291.0/Tx 8291.0KHz
[ACK][RLY][INF][FRQ][HLD][END]
33.. To acknowledge to the distress alert after coordination with the coast station, from the
above right screen, press FUNC key to move the active screen to the message control area.
Then select ACK with jog dial and press ENT to send the acknowledgement.
After acknowledging the distress alert, communicate with the ship in distress as follows;
z Say "MAYDAY".
z Repeat the identity (MMSI) of the ship in distress 3 times
z Say, "This is".
z Repeat the identity (MMSI) of your ship 3 times
z Say "RECEIVED MAYDAY".
xiii
Equipment exterior
●
JSS-2250/2500 (JSS-2250N/2500N) 250W/500W MF/HF Radio Equipment
Note:
According to the composition, the model variants are as follows.
JSS-2250
:250W Radiotelephone/ DSC
JSS-2250N
:250W Radiotelephone/ DSC & NBDP
JSS-2500
:500W Radiotelephone/ DSC
JSS-2500N
:500W Radiotelephone/ DSC & NBDP
In this document, unless otherwise specified, “JSS-2250/2500” may include “JSS-2250N/2500N”.
NTD-2250/2500 Transceiver
NBD-2250/2500 Power supply
NFC-2250/2500 Antenna tuner
NCM-2150 MF/HF Controller/NQW-261 Handset
xiv
NDZ-227 Data terminal / NDF-369 Keyboard
NKG-800 Printer
xv
●
DPU-414 Printer
●
NBB-714 Battery charger (10A)
●
NCH-321A Distress Message Controller (DMC)
xvi
●
●
NKG-91 Printer
NBB-724 Battery charger
Contents
Preface
.........................................................................................................
Before operation
.........................................................................................
Handling precautions
vi
.................................................................................
viii
DISTRESS ALERTS
....................................................................................
xi
Equipment exterior
.....................................................................................
xiv
.......................................................................................
xxi
Glossary of terms
1. EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW
........................................................................
1-1
1.1
Functions
...................................................................................................................
1-1
1.2
Features
.....................................................................................................................
1-1
1.3
Basic configuration
1.3.1
....................................................................................................
1-2
DSC model (JSS-2250/2500) ................................................................................
1-2
1.3.1.1
Standard components
..................................................................................
1-2
1.3.1.2
Options ...........................................................................................................
1-2
DSC/NBDP model (JSS-2250N/2500N) ................................................................
1-3
1.3.2
1.3.2.1
Standard components
..................................................................................
1-3
1.3.2.2
Options ...........................................................................................................
1-3
1.3.3
System configuration
1.4
External dimensions
1.5
Block diagram
...........................................................................................
1-4
..................................................................................................
1-5
............................................................................................................
1-12
1.5.1
DSC model (JSS-2250/2500) ................................................................................
1-12
1.5.2
DSC/NBDP model (JSS-2250N/2500N) ................................................................
1-13
2. NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
......................................................................
2-1
2.1
Controller (NCM-2150)
..............................................................................................
2-1
2.2
Controller’s display ......................................................................................................
2-3
2.2.1
Status display
.......................................................................................................
2.2.2
Operating display
2.2.3
Function screen and key operations
2.2.4
Menu screen
.................................................................................................
2-3
2-4
....................................................................
2-6
........................................................................................................
2-7
2.3
Data terminal（NDZ-227） .........................................................................................
2-8
2.4
Display of data terminal ...............................................................................................
2-9
2.4.1
Regular screen
2.4.2
Telex communication screen
2.4.3
Message file edit screen
3. INSTALLATION
.....................................................................................................
2-9
................................................................................
2-10
......................................................................................
2-11
........................................................................................
3-1
4. OPERATION
4.1
............................................................................................
4-1
...................................................................................................
4-1
4.1.1
Operation of the controller ....................................................................................
4-1
4.1.2
Operation of the data terminal
.............................................................................
4-4
Basic communications procedure
.............................................................................
4-6
..........................................................................................
4-6
4.2
Operation overview
4.2.1
Turning on the power
4.2.2
Turning off the power/ Putting into sleep mode
4.2.3
Communicating in radiotelephone mode
4.2.4
Communicating in CW mode
4.2.5
Receiving AM broadcasts
4.2.6
Communicating in telex mode (TLX)
4.3
...................................................
4-7
............................................................
4-8
..............................................................................
4-10
....................................................................................
4-12
...................................................................
4-13
4.2.6.1
ARQ mode operation
...................................................................................
4-13
4.2.6.2
CFEC mode operation
.................................................................................
4-16
4.2.6.3
SFEC mode operation
.................................................................................
4-20
4.2.6.4
Editing telex messages
................................................................................
4-22
........................................................................................................
4-25
Setting the radio
4.3.1
Setting the communication frequencies
..............................................................
4-25
4.3.2
Setting the communication channels
..................................................................
4-26
4.3.3
Setting the automatic gain control (AGC)
4.3.4
Setting the noise reduction (NR)
4.3.5
Setting the attenuation (ATT)
...........................................................
4-30
.........................................................................
4-30
..............................................................................
4-31
4.3.6
Setting the clarifier ...............................................................................................
4-31
4.3.7
Setting the squelch level
.....................................................................................
4-32
...................................................................................
4-32
4.3.8
Setting the CW bandwidth
4.3.9
Scanning the Rx frequencies
4.3.10 Reducing the Tx power
..............................................................................
4-33
.......................................................................................
4-35
4.3.11 Setting the antenna tuning power
.......................................................................
4.3.12 Setting the Auto Tune Start (ATS) function
4.4
4-35
..........................................................
4-35
Basic DSC operations .................................................................................................
4-36
4.4.1
Routine calls to an individual station
...................................................................
4-36
4.4.2
Receiving routine individual calls
........................................................................
4-38
4.4.3
Routine group calls ..............................................................................................
4-40
4.4.4
Receiving routine group calls
..............................................................................
4-40
Emergency calls (DSC distress/urgency/safety calls) ................................................
4-41
4.5
4.5.1
Safety or urgency calls to an individual station
4.5.1.1
4.5.2
Special safety individual calls
...................................................
4-41
......................................................................
4-41
Receiving safety or urgency individual calls
4.5.2.1
.......................................................
4-43
......................................................
4-43
................................................................................
4-44
Receiving special safety individual calls
4.5.3
Safety or urgency area calls
4.5.4
Receiving safety or urgency area calls
4.5.5
Distress alerts
...............................................................
4-45
......................................................................................................
4-46
4.5.5.1
Quick distress alerts
4.5.5.2
Distress alerts from the menu
4.5.5.3
Receiving distress alerts
4.5.6
....................................................................................
4-46
......................................................................
4-49
..............................................................................
4-52
Distress relay calls on behalf of someone else (DROBOSE)
.............................
4-53
4.6
DSC call log
...............................................................................................................
4.6.1
Received distress messages
4.6.2
Received other messages
4.6.3
Transmitted messages
4-55
...............................................................................
4-55
...................................................................................
4-56
.........................................................................................
4-56
4.7
Display of telex communication logs
.........................................................................
4-57
4.8
USB memory operation
.............................................................................................
4-58
4.9
Popup screens
...........................................................................................................
4-59
5. SETTINGS & REGISTRATIONS
..............................................................
5-1
...............................................................................................
5-1
5.1
Date and time settings
5.2
Own ship position and time settings
5.3
Controller settings
..........................................................................
5-3
......................................................................................................
5-4
5.3.1
LCD adjustment
...................................................................................................
5-4
5.3.2
Sound settings
.....................................................................................................
5-4
5.3.3
User key assignments
5.3.4
Selecting Tx meters
5.3.5
Transferring user channel data to another controller
5.3.6
Setting the inactivity timer (for menu shutdown)
5.3.7
Setting the reference value for the channel auto search
..........................................................................................
5-5
.............................................................................................
5-6
...........................................
5-7
..................................................
5-8
.....................................
5-8
.........................................................................................
5-9
5.4
Registering user channels
5.5
Advanced settings for DSC/WKR
..............................................................................
5-11
5.5.1
Automatic acknowledgement
...............................................................................
5-11
5.5.2
Setting DSC watch frequency
..............................................................................
5-11
5.5.3
Setting receiving alarms
.......................................................................................
5-12
5.5.4
Using medical/neutral settings for urgency calls
5.5.5
Registering the ship's group ID
5.5.6
Setting the inactivity timer (for procedures on hold)
5.5.7
..................................................
5-12
............................................................................
5-12
............................................
5-13
Registering the DSC call list
................................................................................
5-13
5.6
Setting connections for options
5.7
Setting of data terminal
.................................................................................
5-14
..............................................................................................
5-15
...................................................................................................
5-15
5.7.1
LCD adjustment
5.7.2
Registering station list
5.8
Setting telex mode
..........................................................................................
5-17
.....................................................................................................
5-19
6. MAINTENANCE & INSPECTION
.............................................................
6-1
............................................................................
6-1
Self diagnosis inspection
...........................................................................................
6-2
System alarm indication
............................................................................................
6-5
..............................................................................................................
6-6
6.1
General maintenance & inspection
6.2
6.3
6.3.1
Alarm list
6.3.2
Viewing the alarm history
.....................................................................................
6-9
6.4
Software version
........................................................................................................
6-10
6.5
Troubleshooting
.........................................................................................................
6-11
6.5.1
Procedures for locating malfunctions
...................................................................
6-11
6.5.2
Guide to locating faults
........................................................................................
6-12
6.5.3
Consumables
.......................................................................................................
6-13
6.5.4
Repair units/parts
6.5.5
Regular replacement parts
.................................................................................................
...................................................................................
6-13
6-14
7. AFTER-SALES SERVICE
8. DISPOSAL
.......................................................................
7-1
...............................................................................................
8-1
9. SPECIFICATIONS
...................................................................................
9.1
JSS-2250/2500 MF/HF Radio Equipment
9.2
Options
9.3
Peripheral interfaces
9-1
................................................................
9-1
......................................................................................................................
9-5
.................................................................................................
10. OPTIONS OPERATION
9-7
.........................................................................
10-1
10.1 Battery charger (NBB-714)
.......................................................................................
10-1
10.2 Battery charger (NBB-724)
.......................................................................................
10-3
10.3 Printer (NKG-91)
.......................................................................................................
10-5
10.4 Printer (NKG-800)
.....................................................................................................
10-6
10.5 Operations using a SELCALL unit
11. Appendix
............................................................................
10-9
...............................................................................................
11-1
11.1 Frequencies for distress and safety calls
11.2 National DSC frequencies for routine calls
..................................................................
...............................................................
11.3 International DSC frequencies for routine calls
11-2
........................................................
11-2
................................................................................
11-3
........................................................................................
11-23
11.4 ITU channel list (TEL/CW/TLX)
11.5 Guide to MF/HF operation
11-1
Declaration on toxic & hazardous substances or elements
Marking with market circulation mark
Glossary of terms
This section defines general and DSC terms related to this equipment.
● General terms
AMVER
Automated
Mutual-assistance
Rescue System
Vessel
System that informs another ship of position
of distress ship operated in the United States.
ARQ
Automatic Repeat reQuest
When communicating interactive in the telex
mode, this ARQ is used.
CFEC
Collective Forward Error Correction
When broadcasting in the telex mode, this
CFEC is used.
DSC
Digital Selective Calling device
Used in routine calls, safety and urgency
calls, and distress alerts for rescue requests.
GMDSS
Global Maritime Distress and Safety System.
GPS
Global Positioning system
IMO
International Maritime Organization
ITU
International Telecommunication Union
Establishes conventions and regulations for
all electrical wired and radio, land, sea, air,
and space communications. It contains
internal organizations such as ITU-R and
ITU-T.
ITU-R
The International Telecommunications Union
(ITU) radio communications department.
JASREP
Japanese Ship Reporting System
Ship position reporting system operated in
Japan.
LT
Local time
MF/HF
Medium frequencies and high frequencies
(300 kHz to 30 MHz)
MMSI
Maritime Mobile Service Identity
The 9-digit Maritime Mobile Service Identity
number assigned to each ship and coast
station.
NBDP
Narrow Band Direct Printing
It is a generic name of the device used to
communicate in the telex mode.
NMEA
Maritime equipment transmission standard
established by the National Marine
Electronics Association.
PTT
Push to talk
RCC
Rescue Co-ordinate Center
RMS
Remote Maintenance System
Transmits ship equipment information
temporarily stored in the VDR via Inmarsat to
land, for use in maintenance and
management of radio equipment.
RR
Radio Regulations
International regulations for radio transmission
established by the treaty of the ITU.
SELCAL Number(Selective Calling Number)
Selective Calling Number by NBDP.
It is the numbers of four digits (coast station)
or five digits (Ship station) used when the
other party is specified in the telex mode.
xxi
SFEC
Selective Forward Error Correction
When broadcasting to a specific group in the
telex mode, this SFEC is used.
SOLAS Convention
International Convention for Safety of Life at
Sea
The international convention applies to all
ships engaged on international voyages. A
safety certificate is issued if the conditions of
this convention are satisfied.
SQL
Squelch
A function that acts to suppress the audio
output of a receiver in the absence of a radio
signal of sufficient strength.
UTC
Universal Time Coordinated
VOL (Volume)
Speaker volume
WRC
World Radiocommunication Conference
WKR
Watch Keeping Receiver
The WKR is the receiver dedicated to
monitoring
the
distress
and
safety
frequencies.
● DSC terms
Address
General term for Maritime Mobile Serive
Identity number (MMSI).
This equipment uses To/From to distinguish
between the sender and receiver. It also
means the Self-ID (own ship MMSI) and
Dist-ID (MMSI of a ship in distress).
Category
Message code indicating priority of the call.
Priority levels are listed below.
・ Routine… General calls for routine work
・ Safety… Calls for safety communications
・ Urgency… Calls for urgent communications
・ Distress… Calls for distress communications
DROBOSE
Distress relay call (to individual or to area)
on behalf of someone else who is in distress.
EOS (End Of Sequence)
Termination code appended to call
messages.
Other codes are listed below.
・ ACK RQ… Acknowledgement request
・ ACK BQ… Acknowledgement responding
to the ACK RQ
ECC (Error Check Character)
Error check code appended to the end of call
messages.
This is not normally displayed, but if an error
occurs on a message, an ECC error is
displayed.
xxii
Mode
Message code indicating communication
mode after a DSC call.
This equipment is fixed to radiotelephone.
Radiotelephone (TEL) or ARQ and FEC
(TLX) can be used.
Nature of Distress
Message code indicating the type of distress
when a distress alert is issued.
Codes are listed below.
・ Fire…
Fire, explosion
・ Flooding…
Flooding
・ Collision…
Collision
・ Grounding…
Grounding
・ Listing…
Risk of ship capsizing
・ Sinking…
Sinking
・ Disabled…
Ship inoperable/adrift
・ Undesignated…
Undesignated distress
・ Abandoning…
Abandoning ship
・ Piracy attack…
Piracy/robbery attack
・ Man overboard… Man overboard
Polling
Polling is a feature for routine calling.
It is used, for example, to confirm whether a
ship is within radio range when a coast
station requests navigational information of
the ship.
Reason
Message code indicating reason for negative
acknowledgement response.
Codes are listed below.
・ No reason…
・ Congestion…
・ Busy…
・ Queue…
・ Barred…
・ No operator…
・ Temp no oper…
・ EQP disabled…
・ Unable FRQ…
・ Unable mode…
No reason
Maritime information
exchange center
congested
Busy
Queued
Station barred
No operator
Temporarily no operator
Equipment disabled
Indicated
frequency
cannot be used
Indicated mode cannot
be used
Rx FRQ
Received frequency of the call
Subject/ Sub
Message code clarifying communication
contents when sending an urgency call to all
ships.
When sailing in dangerous waters, such as
in areas of political instability, these call
messages are used with the following
information.
・ Neutral ship: In accordance with ITU
resolution 18 (Mob-83), inform all ships
that own ship is of neutral nationality.
・ Medical TRANSP:
Inform all ships
that own ship is performing medical
transportation, and is protected under the
1949 Geneva Convention.
Type
Message code indicating the type of the call.
Codes are listed below.
・ Individual call… Individual call message
・ Individual ACK… Acknowledgement
of
individual call message
・ Individual NACK… Negative acknowledgement
of individual call message
・ Group call…
Group call message
・ GEO area call… Area call message
・ All ships call…
Call to all ships
・ Distress…
Distress alert message
・ Distress ACK… Acknowledgement
of
distress alert message
・ Distress relay… Distress relay message
・ Distress relay ACK… Acknowledgement
of
distress relay message
・ Distress relay GEO… Area call of distress
relay message
Intent
Message code indicating specific content.
Indicates the type of the call for a specific
purpose, not for radiotelephone
communication.
・ Polling…
Polling
・ Position RQ…
Ship position request
・ Ship position…
Ship position notification
・ Test…
Safety test call
Work FRQ/ WFRQ
Message code indicating communication
frequency after a DSC call.
Topic
Message codes in an acknowledged message
After sending an individual call, "Unable to
comply" is displayed when the responding
station cannot comply.
xxiii
xxiv
Equipment Overview
1. EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW
1.1 Functions
This equipment includes MF/HF transceiver, Class-A DSC and DSC watch keeping receiver required
as the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS). It is designed as a separated
transceiver and small, lightweight controller(s) for easy installation not only in SOLAS Convention
ships such as international passenger ships and freight ships of 300 tons or more, but also
non-conventional ships of less than 300 tons.
As for the main communication function, in addition to the communications of radiotelephone with the
handset and the Morse communication with the CW keyer, calling by digital selective calling (DSC) for
a general or distress communication are possible. Furthermore, if the data terminal is connected to the
controller, the telex communication in the ARQ or FEC mode using the NBDP is available.
1.2 Features
● Compliant with the ITU Radio Regulations (RR), the IMO performance standards, and the ITU-R
recommendations.
● Contains all channels specified in the ITU Radio Regulations (RR).
● The separately designed controller and main unit enable easy installation in limited or difficult
spaces.
● A semi-transmissive LCD with a wide viewing angle is easily viewable even in direct light or when
backlit and allows it to be installed in a variety of positions.
● The backlights of the LCD and operation keys are fully adjustable, preventing interference with
night watch keeping.
● When in distress, the DSC can send a distress message with the expanded position data accurate
up to 1/10000 of a minute for both latitude and longitude to make search and rescue operations by
the RCC easier.
● High-quality stable operation is possible by using DSP technology on a transceiver with a
DSC/WKR modem.
● The DSC operates in Class A mode suitable for all areas, and in Class B mode limited to ships
navigating in A1 and A2 areas.
● An advanced digital audio amplifier with a built-in loud speaker provides a maximum of 5 W of
clear audio.
● The maintenance and the check can be easily done at daily or the regular services, because a
special function key was prepared for the DSC safety test calling and the self-diagnosis.
● It is possible to operate on the screen with the character color and the background color
corresponding to the favor because the data terminal for the telex communication by NBDP
adopted the color liquid crystal display of the wide viewing angle in high brightness.
● Besides printers and GPS, other peripherals such as the remote maintenance system (RMS) can
be connected to the equipment.
1-1
Equipment Overview
1.3 Basic configuration
1.3.1
1.3.1.1
DSC model (JSS-2250/2500)
Standard components
No.
3-1
3-2
1.3.1.2
Description
Transceiver
Power supply
MF/HF controller
Controller cable
Handset
Antenna tuner
Instruction manual
Model
NTD-2250/2500
NBD-2250/2500
NCM-2150
7ZCJD0343
NQW-261
NFC-2250/2500
7ZPJD0622
Qty
Notes
For 250W and 500W respectively
For 250W and 500W respectively
5m
Includes the cradle
For 250W and 500W respectively
This manual
Options
No.
Description
Model
Notes
Battery charger
NBB-724
22A
Battery charger
NBB-714
10A *For maintenance-free sealed battery only
For both RX and WKR
Joint box
JQD-69C
Junction box
NQD-2253
Coaxial connector
M-P-7, M-A-JJ
For RG-12/UY and RG-10/UY
6-1
6-2
6-3
MF/HF controller
Controller cable
Handset
Flush mounting bracket
NCM-2150
7ZCJD0343
NQW-261
MPBC42957
One additional controller available.
5m
Waterproof type (IP66 equivalent)
6-4
6-5
Mounting bracket
Connection box
MPBX44354
NQD-2250
Printer
NKG-800/900
7-1
Printer connection cable
6ZCSC00407
7-2
Printer power cable
6JNKD00100B
7-3
Printer paper
5ZPCM00020
7-4
Ink ribbon (SP-16051)
5ZZCM00003
Printer
NKG-91
8-1
Printer connection cable
7ZCJD0254A
8-2
Printer paper
7ZPJD0384
8-3
Wall mounting bracket
MPBP31446
Printer
DPU-414
9-1
Printer connection cable
7ZCJD0254A
9-2
Printer power cable
7ZCJD0257C
9-3
Printer paper
6ZCAF00252A
10
Distress message controller
NCH-321A
1-2
For extension and expansion of the controller
Desktop type
Wall mount or
flush mount type
Desktop type
Equipment Overview
1.3.2
1.3.2.1
No.
3-1
3-2
5-1
5-2
5-3
6-1
6-2
1.3.2.2
No.
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
9-1
9-2
9-3
10
10-1
10-2
10-3
11
DSC/NBDP model (JSS-2250N/2500N)
Standard components
Description
Transceiver
Power supply
MF/HF controller
Controller cable
Handset
Antenna tuner
Data terminal
DTE cable
DTE power cable
Keyboard
Printer
Printer connection cable
Printer power cable
Instruction manual
Model
NTD-2250/2500
NBD-2250/2500
NCM-2150
7ZCJD0343
NQW-261
NFC-2250/2500
NDZ-227
7ZCJD0388
7ZCJD0419
NDF-369
NKG-800
7ZCSC0205A
6JNKD00100B
7ZPJD0622
Qty
Notes
For 250W and 500W respectively
For 250W and 500W respectively
5m
Includes the cradle
For 250W and 500W respectively
NBDP option
This manual
Options
Description
Battery charger
Battery charger
Joint box
Junction box
Coaxial connector
MF/HF controller
Controller cable
Handset
Flush mounting bracket
Mounting bracket
Connection box
Data terminal
DTE cable
DTE power cable
Keyboard
Mounting bracket
USB memory
Printer
Printer connection cable
Printer power cable
Printer paper
Ink ribbon (SP-16051)
Printer
Printer connection cable
Printer paper
Wall mounting bracket
Printer
Printer connection cable
Printer power cable
Printer paper
Distress message controller
Model
NBB-724
NBB-714
JQD-69C
NQD-2253
M-P-7, M-A-JJ
NCM-2150
7ZCJD0343
NQW-261
MPBC42957
MPBX44354
NQD-2250
NDZ-227
7ZCJD0388
7ZCJD0419
NDF-369
MPBP31721
UDG4-1GAR-JRC
NKG-800/900
7ZCSC0205A
6JNKD00100B
5ZPCM00020
5ZZCM00003
NKG-91
7ZCJD0254A
7ZPJD0384
MPBP31446
DPU-414
7ZCJD0254A
7ZCJD0257C
6ZCAF00252A
NCH-321A
Notes
22A
10A *For maintenance-free sealed battery only
For both RX and WKR
For RG-12/UY and RG-10/UY
One additional controller available.
5m
Waterproof type (IP66 equivalent)
For extension and expansion of the controller
For expansion of the controller
Hagiwara Sys-Com / 1GB
Desktop type
Wall mount or
flush mount type
Desktop type
1-3
Equipment Overview
1.3.3
System configuration
NKG-800 Printer
NCM-2150 MF/HF Controller
NQW-261 Handset
NDZ-227 Data terminal
NDF-369 Keyboard
(DSC/NBDP model only)
Expansion Controller
NTD-2250/2500 Transceiver
GPS
NBD-2250/2500 Power supply
NFC-2250/2500
Antenna Tuner
NCH-321A DMC
NBB-724 Battery charger
* The equipment can also be
connected to the VDR
server to use the remote
maintenance system.
1-4
Equipment Overview
1.4 External dimensions
Below are the external dimensions of each unit.
（１）
Transceiver (NTD-2250/2500)
Unit: mm
Weight: Approx. 15 kg/ 17 kg
Note) This figure shows the NTD-2250.
Incase of the NTD-2500, 3 fans are
mounted on the back.
（２）
Power Supply (NBD-2250/2500)
Unit: mm
Weight: Approx. 15 kg/ 18 kg
1-5
Equipment Overview
（３）
MF/HF Controller (NCM-2150)
Unit: mm
Weight: Approx. 1.3 kg
（４）
Handset (NQW-261)
Mounting
hole
（５）
Unit: mm
Weight: Approx. 0.5 kg
Connection box (NQD-2250)
Unit: mm
Weight: Approx. 0.6 kg
1-6
Equipment Overview
（６）
Antenna Tuner (NFC-2250/2500)
Unit: mm
Weight: Approx. 10 kg/ 10 kg
（７）
Junction Box (NQD-2253)
Unit: mm
Weight: Approx. 1.2 kg
1-7
Equipment Overview
（８）
Data Terminal (NDZ-227)
Unit: mm
Weight: Approx. 4.6 kg
（９）
Keyboard (NDF-369)
Unit: mm
Weight: Approx. 0.4 kg
1-8
Equipment Overview
（１０） Printer (NKG-800)
● Desktop type
Unit: mm
Weight: Approx. 3.7 kg
（１１）
Printer (DPU-414)
● Desktop type
Unit: mm
Weight: Approx. 0.6 kg
1-9
Equipment Overview
（１２） Printer (NKG-91)
● Wall mount type
Unit: mm
Weight: Approx. 1.5 kg
● Flash mount type
Unit: mm
Weight: Approx. 0.8 kg
1-10
Equipment Overview
（１３） Battery Charger (NBB-714)
Unit: mm
Weight: Approx. 8.6 kg
（１４） Battery Charger (NBB-724)
Unit: mm
Weight: Approx. 12 kg
1-11
Equipment Overview
1.5 Block diagram
1.5.1
DSC model (JSS-2250/2500)
Rx/WKR
antenna
Tx antenna
JQD-69C
Joint box
Lead wire
TH-19/1.2
RG-12/UY
NQW-261
Handset
M-P-7
NCM-2150
MF/HF Controller
7ZCJD
0343
（5m）
TTYCS- 4
DPYC-2.5
M-P-7
NTD-2250/2500
Transceiver
NQD-2250
Connection
box
6.5V DC
RX/WKR ANT
TX
ANT
M-P-7/M-P-5
M-A-JJ
RG-10/UY
TX ANT
7ZCJD
0426
NFC-2250/2500
Antenna tuner
TTYCYS-4
NQD-2253
Junction
box
NBD-2250/2500
Power supply
7ZCJD0254A
NBB-724
Battery charger
NKG-91
Printer
DPYC-16
100V/220V AC
50/60Hz 1φ
DPYC-25
24V DC
200Ah
TTYCS- 4
DPYC-2.5
NQD-2250
Connection
box
TTYCS- 1
Expansion controller
MPYCS- 7
NCH-321A
DMC
TTYCS- 1
RMS
(VDR)
TTYCS- 4
1-12
GPS
AME
Equipment Overview
1.5.2
DSC/NBDP model (JSS-2250N/2500N)
Rx/WKR
antenna
Tx antenna
JQD-69C
Joint box
Lead wire
TH-19/1.2
RG-12/UY
NQW-261
Handset
M-P-7
NCM-2150
MF/HF Controller
7ZCJD
0343
（5m）
TTYCS- 4
DPYC-2.5
M-P-7
NTD-2250/2500
Transceiver
NQD-2250
Connection
box
7ZCJD0419
RX/WKR ANT
TX
ANT
M-P-7/M-P-5
M-A-JJ
RG-10/UY
TX ANT
7ZCJD
0426
NFC-2250/2500
Antenna tuner
TTYCYS-4
NQD-2253
Junction
box
NBD-2250/2500
Power supply
7ZCJD0388
NBB-724
Battery charger
NDZ-227
Data terminal
DPYC-16
100V/220V AC
50/60Hz 1φ
DPYC-25
24V DC
200Ah
NDF-369
Keyboard
7ZCSC0205A
6JNKD00100B
NKG-800
Printer
TTYCS- 4
DPYC-2.5
NQD-2250
Connection
box
TTYCS- 1
Expansion controller
GPS
MPYCS- 7
NCH-321A
DMC
TTYCS- 1
RMS
(VDR)
TTYCS- 4
AME
1-13
Equipment Overview
1-14
Names and Functions
2. NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
2.1 Controller (NCM-2150)
The controller parts and their functions are described below.
10
11 12
13 14
1. Internal loud speaker
2. Jack for telegraph in continuous wave (CW) mode
3. Black and white liquid crystal display unit
4. Numeric keypad (10-key) and function keys
15
16
In addition to entering numeric values, when combined with the
FUNC key, the keys have the following functions.
･ TEL
··· Sets TEL mode with the last or default frequency.
･ DSC
··· Sets DSC mode with the last or default frequency.
･ CW
··· Sets CW mode with the last or default frequency.
･ 1 CLAR
··· Displays the setting screen for the clarifier.
･ 2 SCAN
··· Displays the scan menu.
･ 3 NR
··· Displays the setting screen for noise reduction.
･ 4 ATT
··· Displays the setting screen for attenuation.
･ 5 AGC
··· Displays the setting screen for automatic gain control.
･ 6 SP
··· Turns speaker on or off.
･ 7 PRN
··· Prints the specified screen.
･ 8 TEST
··· Displays the self-diagnosis menu.
･ 9
PW R
RDC
··· Switches Tx power between high, medium and low.
･ 0
TEST
CALL
··· Displays the DSC test call menu.
･ FUNC
··· Enables 10-key functions or changes an active screen.
2-1
Names and Functions
･
ENT
····· Enter key.
･ USER
····· User defined key. Register a frequently used menu to open it quickly.
･
ANT
TUNE
····· Tunes the antenna.
･
CH
····· Sets the channel input mode (user channel, ITU channel, or free frequency).
5. Jog dial
- On the status display, rotating the jog dial changes the channel or Rx frequency.
- On the operating display, rotating the jog dial changes the frequency on the transceiver
setting screen, selects the event on the procedure list screen, or selects the handling menu
on the message/event control screen.
- On a menu or popup screen, rotating the jog dial moves the cursor position or screen
contents. When selecting a button or an item on the screen, rotate the jog dial until the
cursor is on it and then press the jog dial.
Note
Pressing the jog dial works as with the Enter key.
6. Handset connector
7. DISTRESS key (Under a clear cover with spring)
When in distress, sends a DSC distress alert when pressed and held for 4 seconds.
8. RF GAIN control
Adjusts sensitivity level.
Note
RF GAIN is set to maximum just after DSC or TLX mode is set, regardless of the
position of the control.
9. DIM (Dimmer) key
Adjusts dimmer level (Max → Typ → Min → Off) of the LCD display and key switches.
Additionally used to put into sleep mode by pressing it in combination with the
PW R
CONT
key at the
same time (a confirmation screen is displayed).
Note
・ The adjusted dimmer level is not saved. When the controller is powered off
and on again, the dimmer level is always set to Typ (default).
・ If a DSC message is received, the dimmer adjustment cycle becomes "Max →
Typ → Typ → Typ" while the receiving alarm is activated.
10. PWR/CONT (Power/Contrast) key
Turns on the equipment or changes the controller from sleep mode to standby. Once turned on,
this key is also used to adjust the LCD contrast.
11. VOL (Volume) control
Adjusts volume of built-in loud speaker.
12. ALM/WKR (Alarm/Watchkeeping receiver) lamp
Lights up red on any malfunction detected in the equipment or after sending a DSC distress alert,
or blinks red on receiving a DSC call. Lights green to indicate the DSC watchkeeping receiver is
operating while the equipment is in sleep mode.
13. CANCEL key
Cancels menus, a procedure on the operating display or stops alarms.
14. MENU key
Displays menu list.
15. Handset
When using in radiotelephone mode, press and hold the PTT key to talk.
16. Cradle (for handset)
2-2
Names and Functions
2.2 Controller’s display
The LCD screen on the controller changes according to current conditions. This section
describes the status display, operating display, FUNC menu, and main menu screens.
2.2.1
Status display
TEL ITU- 401
RX 4357.0 kHz
TX 4065.0 kHz
10
1.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
Occupied mark. Indicates another controller
has the access rights.
2.
Indicates the ship's MMSI.
3.
Indicates the ship's position and that time.
4.
Indicates the communication mode and
channel.
5.
Indicates the receiver is scanning.
6.
Indicates the Tx power condition (reduction
settings) as follows.
z High
: (Blank)
z Medium
z Low
7.
Indicates the following conditions if Tx
frequency is not tuned.
z Not tuned
: Blinks
z Tuning
: Lights
z Tuned
: (Blank)
8.
Indicates transmission status (PA power).
9.
When in reception or standby, indicates
strength of received signal (S meter), or
when in transmission, indicates strength of
transmitted signal in one of the pre-set
units shown below.
z Tx power (PWR)
z Antenna current (Ia)
z PA voltage (Vc)
z PA current (Ic)
z Key information (KEY)
Note: When transmitting in ARQ mode, KEY
is displayed regardless of the above
mentioned setting.
Additionally, the right icon indicates the
built-in loud speaker is on or off. The mark
of
indicates the squelch is on.
13
14
15
16
17
SIG
NonDST:
WKR scan bands: D R OB O S :
2 4 6 8 12 16MHz E d tD S T :
11
12
18
19
10. Indicates the frequency (band) the DSC
watch keeping receiver is monitoring for
distress and safety calls.
11. Indicates the equipment is running on DC
power.
12. Indicates current time as follows:
z Universal time coordinated : UTC
z Local time
: LT
13. Indicates the source of the ship's position
information as follows.
z External device (e.g. GPS) : EXT
z Manual input
: MAN
z No input
: OFFLINE
14. Indicates the user channel in use is
transmitted at the band power level
because the channel power is not
registered.
15. Indicates channel or frequency is duplex
for communicating with a coast station.
16. Indicates the reception frequency.
17. Indicates the transmission frequency. TX
mark is highlighted when transmitting.
18. Indicates the reception status (attenuation,
AGC, noise reduction).
19. Indicates the operation guidance (shortcut)
to send the DSC messages.
z NonDST: To send a non-distress alert,
holding down the MENU, press 1 key.
z DROBOS: To send a drobose call,
holding down the MENU, press 2 key.
z EdtDST: To edit & send a distress alert,
holding down the MENU, press 3 key.
2-3
Names and Functions
2.2.2
Operating display
(1) General
After setting the frequency, pressing PTT key in TEL mode, sending/receiving messages in
DSC/TLX mode, and things like that, the controller shows the operating display as follows.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL
13077.0
12230.0
UP
Communicating on
TEL Rx:13077.0/Tx:12230.0kHz
Tip)Use FUNC to change op area.
[HLD][END]
1.
Indicates the MMSI and the latest position
and that time.
2.
Indicates an focused screen with
sign
and thick-frame, i.e. the operating display
is divided into three screens as below,
where the focused screen can be moved
using the FUNC key for clockwise.
Transceiver
setting
4.
Indicates the S meter and watchkeeping
receiver monitoring frequencies mentioned
above.
5.
Indicates the existing procedures. If the
procedure is under operation (active), A
mark is added in the box frame. Further, if
other procedures on hold exist, they are
indicated in the other box frames and are
selectable to operate at any time. And
while this screen is focused, the turning
dial animation is shown as below.
Procedure
list
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
Message/event
TEL
13077.0
12230.0
control
3.
Indicates the transceiver setting screen
similar to the status display. Icons on this
area are as follows.
z Scanning
z Not tuned yet
z Tx power reduction
z Turned the PA ON
z Attenuation (dB)
z AGC ( Fast/ Slow)
z Noise reduction (NR1/NR2/BC) :
Note
2-4
UP
Communicating on
TEL Rx:13077.0/Tx:12230.0kHz
Tip)Use FUNC to change op area.
[HLD][END]
6.
Indicates the content and the handling
menus of the procedure located at the top
of the procedure list screen.
During operating an active procedure, any functions such like the DSC automatic
acknowledgement become invalid to avoid the ongoing communication interruption.
Names and Functions
(2) Operating display of DSC calls
When communicating using DSC messages, the controller shows as follows.
1.
2.
Indicates the transceiver setting screen
similar to the status display mentioned
above.
4.
Indicates procedures information of active
or on hold with the DSC categories or COM.
Note
Indicates the message info as follows;
¾ Destination/source ID to comm with:
TxTO/RxID
¾ Address type:
IND, Area, GRP, All
¾ Category or DST type:
RTN, SAF, URG, DST
DISTRESS ALT, DST RLY,
¾ Other information:
ACK, NACK
Indicates the message type according to
the following components.
¾ Call direction : Calling event Called event ¾ Category
: RTN… routine
SAF… safety
URG… urgency
DST… distress
¾ Address type : IND… individual
ARE… area
GRP… group
¾ DST type
: ALT… distress alert
RLY… distress relay
CNL… distress cancel
ACK… distress ack
¾ Other type
: TST… safety test
POS… safety position
POLL… routine polling
EOS… routine ind w/o ack
Additionally, indicates COMM if started
communication without using DSC.
3.
5.
Indicates the DSC message status with the
elapsed time of the top frame procedure.
Additionally the following special marks may
be indicated on this line.
E … Indicates when including the ECC
error in the message.
D … Indicates when the DSC procedure
is started by receiving a delayed
ACK without a calling message.
6.
Indicates the message received frequency.
7.
Indicates the subsequent frequency if exist.
8.
Indicates the handling menus. This figure
shows the following menus.
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
¾
ACK
NCK
NEW
INF
HLD
END
: Accepts the call and sends ACK
: Sends “unable to comply”
: Sends ACK with new work FRQ
: Indicates the detail info
: Makes the active proc on hold
: Terminates the procedure
- When sending the “able to comply” acknowledgement against the received
message requesting the TEL communication, lifting handset is also available as a
substitute for selecting the ACK handling menu.
- When selecting the NEW or NCK menu, the dedicated popup screen is appeared.
- When sending an acknowledgement automatically to the receiving calls such as
position request, safety test, polling, or the call requesting communication with
an invalid frequency, the above screen is shown and starts sending automatically.
After finishing it, that screen is closed automatically.
2-5
Names and Functions
2.2.3
Function screen and key operations
The functions assigned to the number keys are temporarily enabled by pressing the FUNC
key in the status display or holding down the FUNC key and pressing the number key.
1 CLAR :
2 SCAN :
3 NR
4 ATT
5 AGC :
6 SP
7 N/A
8 TEST :
PW R
9 RDC
0 TstCall :
FuncCncl :
Displays the clarifier adjustment menu
Displays the scan menu
Displays the noise reduction menu
Displays the attenuation menu
Displays the AGC menu
Turns the built-in loud speaker on or off
PRN is valid only on specific menus.
Displays the self-diagnosis menu
Displays the Tx power reduction menu
Displays the DSC test call menu
Closes this screen
1.
Indicates the enabled number key and its
function when the FUNC key is pressed in
the status display. Pressing the number
keys here operates the function for that
key as shown at the right.
2.
Indicates that pressing ENT enables or disables the use of the jog dial to change the frequency
and channel in the status display.
Note
Equipment
status
- During the operating display mentioned above, the function screen is not appeared.
In this case the FUNC key alone is available to select the screen. However note
that the holding down the FUNC key and pressing the number key is also valid.
- In the following situations the function assigned to the function key cannot be used.
1 CLAR
2 SCAN
3 NR
4 ATT
5 AGC
6 SP
7 PRN
8 TEST
PW R
RDC
TEST
CALL
DSC mode
●
While printing
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
During
self-diagnosis
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
While
scanning
●
While alarm
screen is
displayed
●
2-6
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Names and Functions
2.2.4
Menu screen
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL Rx:13077.0/Tx:12230.0kHz
Main menu
1.DSC non-distress call
2.DSC drobose call
3.Editing a distress msg
4.DSC logs
5.Radio operation
6.Maintenance
7.Setup
0.Back
1.
Indicates the current menu name.
2.
Indicates the menu content. The cursor line
or position is highlighted. Select items with
the jog dial and press ENT to confirm.
3.
Indicates the main radio information the
same as the status display. Also indicates
the following marks in the frequency
information area according to the
conditions.
： Performing the antenna tuning
(Blinking means “Not tuned”.)
M ： Tx power is Medium.
： Tx power is low.
2-7
Names and Functions
2.3 Data terminal（NDZ-227）
This section describes the name of each part in the data terminal and the function.
1. Color liquid crystal display (LCD) unit
2. POWER lamp
This lamp lights to green while operating the data terminal, and blinks during the sleep.
3. READY lamp
This lamp lights to green while serial communications are being normally done. And, when
abnormality occurs, it turns off.
4. COMM lamp
This lamp lights to green while communicating in ARQ or FEC mode.
5. DIM (Dimmer) key
This key adjusts the brightness of the LCD screen and the lamp by four stages (high, middle, low,
and off).
6. Connector for the USB memory with the water-proof rubber cap
Pull out the rubber cap and connect the USB memory.
7. Keyboard
2-8
Names and Functions
2.4 Display of data terminal
The content displayed on the LCD screen in the data terminal is different according to the
situation. This section describes a regular screen, the telex communication screen, and the
message file edit screen.
2.4.1
Regular screen
[TLX] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz
File
Tune
USB
Connect
Free sig.
S TS -T B- YB Y
Scanning info
[No scanning]
Service
Calling
STATUS INFO
Receive
Rephasing
System
Repeat
Help
Traf
Tuner/Tx.POWER
TUNER
:[READY]
Tx.POWER :[HIGH]
Last status message
10
Move the cursor to the item you want with ↑, ↓, →, ← then press Enter.
File manager.
Information:MEM KBD PRN USB (Press the +I if you want to know detail.)
1.
Indicates the Tx and Rx frequencies.
2.
Indicates the communication mode.
3.
Indicates the main menu.
When pressing the Enter key, indicates
the drop-down menu of the main menu
pointed by the cursor.
※Telex mode only.
4.
Indicates the conditions
communication.
※Telex mode only.
5.
Indicates the scanning information in telex
mode. When restarting scanning after
sending a DSC Auto-ACK or powering
off/on, indicates “Running now” instead of
the detail information.
※Telex mode only.
6.
of
the
7.
Indicates the guide according to the
cursor position. Moreover, the locating
faults are displayed if any errors occur.
z Information: MEM ：Internal memory
z Information: KBD
：Keyboard control
z Information: PRN
：Printer
z Information: USB
：USB Memory
8.
Indicates that the connected USB memory
is available. Additionally, “ACS” is shown
if some time is needed to mount the USB
memory.
9.
Indicates the antenna tuning condition.
z READY
：Tuned
z NOT READY
：Not tuned
telex
10. Indicates the power reduction setting.
Indicates the operation result such as the
self-diagnosis.
2-9
Names and Functions
2.4.2
Telex communication screen
[TLX] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz
Free sig.
A RA QR Q
USB
TELEX Terminal Window
Calling
Rephasing
Send
Repeat
Traf
Message start...
1.
2-10
F2 WRU | F3 Hereis | F4 TMS | F5 Over | F8 F.Send | F10 Stop
Indicates the operating condition of the
telex communication from the left of each
segment as follows.
1） In the autotelex mode, when the free
channel signal of the coast station is
detected, indicates the “Free Sig”.
2） Indicates the communication mode
(ARQ/CFEC/SFEC).
※ Indicates “ST-BY” in the standby
condition.
3） Indicates “Calling” at the master
station, and “Called” at the slave
station.
4） Indicates “Send” at the information
sending station, and “Receive” at the
information receiving station.
5） Indicates "Phasing" while calling and
connecting
the
communication
channel
and
“Rephasing”
while
reconnecting the channel after the
channel is disconnected due to the
channel condition in ARQ mode.
6） Indicates “Repeat” in ARQ mode if
requested to send the each block or
the control signal again.
7） Indicates “Traf” while sending or
receiving information and “RQ” while
sending or receiving RQ signal.
2.
Indicates the telex message or the name
of the executed function key.
3.
Indicates the usable function keys guide.
Each meaning is as follows.
z F2 WRU ： Requests the answerback
code
to
the
corresponding station.
z F3 Hereis ： Sends the answerback
code of own station.
z F4 TMS
： Sends the date and the
time information.
z F5 Over
： Exchange the sending
and
the
receiving
condition.
z F6 POLL ： Acquires the sending
right if the corresponding station (sending)
tries to finish the
communication in ARQ
mode.
※ It is available only when the
corresponding station is using the
modem made of our company.
z F8 F.Send ： Sends a message file.
z F10 Stop ： Finishes
the
telex
communication.
Names and Functions
2.4.3
Message file edit screen
MF
HF
1.
[TLX] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz
Editing telex file:001.TLX
USB
Line:
1 Column: 1 Size:
0 Insert On
[End of File]
F1:Insert Off
F2:Ins_Line
F7:Quit
F3:Block
F8:Save As
Indicates the state of the edit screen as
follows.
z Editing telex file ：File name
z Line
：Line position of cursor
z Column
：Row position of cursor
z Size
：Capacity of file
z Insert On/Overwrite ：Input mode (insert/overwrite)
2.
The message file is edited here.
3.
The list of the function key is displayed by the
following content separately for two groups.
z Group 1
・ F1 ：Insert On/Off
・ F2 ：Ins_Line
・ F3 ：Block
・ F4 ：Del_Word
・ F5 ：Del_Line
F4:Del_Word
F9:Save & Quit
F5:Del_Line
F10: - Others -
・ F6 ：
・ F7 ：Quit
・ F8 ：Save As
・ F9 ：Save & Quit
・ F10 ：- Others Group 2
・ F1 ：Max Column
・ F2 ：Set Tab
・ F3 ：Undo_Char
・ F4 ：Undo_Word
・ F5 ：Undo_Line
・ F6 ：Merge File
・ F7 ：Find
・ F8 ：Print out
・ F9 ：Find/Replace
・ F10 ：- Others -
2-11
Installation
3. INSTALLATION
CAUTION
To install this equipment, contact our service center or agents.
Special knowledge on selecting the place where the antenna is to be mounted and
setting the ID number (MMSI) assigned to the ship is required in addition to
installing the equipment.
3-1
Operation
4. OPERATION
This chapter describes basic operations of the controller and the data terminal,
radiotelephone communications, telex communications, DSC calling procedures, and
other radio functions.
4.1
4.1.1
Operation overview
Operation of the controller
Basically, the controller is operated with the numeric keypad (10key), the MENU key, and the jog
dial for other than the telex communication. The following is an overview of their operation.
When two controllers are connected, only one controller having the access right can operate
the equipment except for sending a distress alert, changing audio volume, and changing
display conditions. (Unless otherwise mentioned, the instructions below are for the controller
with the access rights.)
To obtain the access right at a controller without access rights, press ENT to get the access
right unless the other controller is being operated (PTT/KEY ON or menu operations).
The DISTRESS key is always available. (The DISTRESS key has the highest priority.)
On the status display or the operating display, the communication frequency or channel can
be set by using the number keys or if the transceiver setting screen is focused on, setting it
by rotating the jog dial is also available.
Pressing the TEL DSC or CW key changes the communication mode. If the screen displays
in the menu, immediately shows the status display or the operating display, and also the
channel input mode changes to the free frequency mode. Additionally, the communication
mode can be changed to the AM mode to listen to the radio broadcasting or to the DATA
mode to communicate using the intership fax
When the communication mode is set to TEL or CW, pressing the same communication mode
key turns the PA on and off. (When the PA is on, ON mark appears.)
All functions can be accessed using the MENU key, jog dial, and the dedicated keys/controls.
(See the menu tree on the next page.) Further, screens in the menu tree indicated by
"Printable" can be printed from a printer connected to the controller or the data terminal by
pressing and holding the F U N C key and then pressing the 7 P R N key.
Pressing or pressing and holding the FUNC (function) key and a number key allows rapid
access to that function.
There are two ways to access main menu items. After pressing the MENU key to display the
main menu, use either the jog dial to move the cursor to the desired item and press ENT to
select it, or select the item by pressing the respective number key. (Ex: For Self diagnosis
(6.1.1 Transceiver), press MENUÎ6 SP Î1 CLAR Î1 CLAR )
Any menu can be assigned to the USER key to open it with a single touch of a button.
Normally the
Pressing the CH key changes the channel input mode to the User ch, ITU ch or to the free
frequency. This key is enabled when showing the status display or the operating display.
Pressing the CANCEL key in any menu moves the display up one level in the hierarchy (or to
the status display). The same results can be achieved by selecting "0. Back" when available
on-screen. Further, pressing the CANCEL key on an input line will clear the entered data.
P r e s s i n g t h e M E N U k e y i n a n y m e n u o p e n s t h e m a i n m e n u . A l s o , p r e s s i n g M E N U while
in the main menu returns to the status display or the operating display.
Dialog boxes (popup screens) are opened when necessary and operations can be done in
the dialog box.
When using DSC calls, to distinguish the messages or conditions, some specific alarms are
provided as listed after the menu tree below.
ANT
TUNE
key is always enabled.
4-1
Operation
Menu tree
Main Menu
Hierarchical Menu 1
Hierarchical Menu 2
1. DSC non-distress call
2. DSC drobose call
3. Editing a distress msg
4. DSC logs
5. Radio operation
7. Setup
Note
MENU+3
4.1 Received distress
(Received message screen)
Printable
4.2 Received others
(Received message screen)
Printable
4.3
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
(Tran smit ted me s sag e s cre en)
5. 1 User channel list (table)
5.2 ITU channel list (table)
Printable
Printable
Printable
Transmitted calls
User channel list (index)
ITU channel list (index)
Mode
Receiver
5.5 Transmitter
6. Maintenance
Shortcut Key
MENU+1 ( R T N )
FUNC+0 ( Te s t )
MENU+2
6.1 Self diagnosis
6.2 Alarm information
6.3 Software ve rsion
7.1 Date & time
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
5.4.6
5.4.7
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
Auto gain control
Noise reduction
Attenuation
Clarifier
Squelch
CW bandwidth
Scan
Power
Tune power
Auto tune start
6.1.1 Transceiver
(ATU/PA/TRX /WKR MODEM)
6.1.2 Controller/DTE
6.1.3 Transceiver log
6.1.4 Controller/DTE log
6.1.5 DSC/NBDP loop
6.1.6 Printout
Alarm history
FUNC+5
FUNC+3
FUNC+4
FUNC+1
FUNC+2
FUNC+9
Printable
FUNC+8
Printable
Printable
Printable
Printable
Printable
Printable
7.1.1 Date
7.1.2 Present time
7.1.3 Display form
7.2 POS/TIME
7. 2.1 Own position
7.3 My controller
7. 3.1 LCD adjustment
1. Contrast
2. Dimmer
3. Screen saver
7.2.2 UTC of position
7.3.2 Sound
1. Operation
2. Notification leve l
3. Sidetone
7.3.3 User key assign
FUNC+6 ( S P )
7.3.4 Tx meter
7.3.5 Data transfer
7.3.6 Menu shutdown
7.3.7 CH search ref
7.4 User channels (index)
7.4 User channels (table)
7.5 DSC/W KR condition
7.5.1 Automatic ACK
1. Test call
2. Position RQ call
3. Polling call
4. Individual call
7.5.2 WKR scanning FRQ
7.5.3 DSC alarm setting
1. Safet y/ Rout in e R X ALM
2. Distress RX ALM
7.5.4 Medical use
Printable
7.5.5 Neutral use
7.5.6 Group-ID
7.5.7 Inactivit y timeout
1. ACKed distress alert
2. RCVed other distress
3. Non-distress call
4. Other communications
7.5.8 DSC call list
7.6 Option
7.6.1 Connection
7.6.2 Data out
7.6.3 Baudrate
7.6.4 Flow control
7.6.5 Print direction
4-2
Printable
Operation
DSC alarm specifications
The following table summarizes the alarm characteristics when communicating particularly in the
DSC mode.
Reason for the alarm
Receiving a new distress
event
Sound
Two tones of
2200Hz(250ms) and 1300Hz(250ms)
Increase
Yes
Shutdow n
Manually
Acknowledging a received
distress event
Two tones of
2200Hz(500ms) and 1300Hz(500ms)
No
Manually
Acknowledging a sent own
distress event
Two tones of
2200Hz(500ms) and 1300Hz(500ms)
No
Manually
Receiving a new urgency
event
Intermittent tones of
2200Hz(250ms) and silence(250ms)
Yes
Manually
Acknowledging a sent
urgency event
Intermittent tones of
2200Hz(500ms) and silence(500ms)
No
Manually
Receiving a new safety or
routine event
Two tones of
784Hz(1s) and 392Hz(1s)
Yes
Automatically
(10s)
Acknowledging a sent safety
or routine event
Intermittent tones of
784Hz(1s) and silence(1s)
No
Automatically
(10s)
Receiving a DSC message
pertinent to an ongoing event
Intermittent tones of
494Hz(100ms), silence(100ms) and
494Hz(1s)
An intermittent tone of
2000Hz(500ms) and silence(500ms)
No
Automatically
(1 cycle)
No
---
Pressing the dedicated
distress button
Note
If receiving a DSC message with the ECC error, the alarm is stopped automatically.
However if the same DSC messages are received repeatedly and the every error is
corrected at last, the original alarm may be sounded.
4-3
Operation
4.1.2
Operation of the data terminal
Basically, the every function concerning the telex mode such as ARQ/FEC communication or
scanning can be operated from the data terminal.
●
To connect and install the data terminal, setup the 7.6 Option menu of the controller.
●
To set the communicate mode to the telex mode, press the Enter key of the keyboard.
Additionally, that operation acquires the access right if the controller connected to that data
terminal does not have the access right.
●
Every function of the data terminal can be operated from the main menu displayed on a
regular screen, excluding the screen of communication modes other than the telex, telex
communicating screen, the telex file editing screen.
●
Because the short-cut key to the table of next page is allocated in each item of the main
menu or the drop down menu, it is possible to execute it easily according to few procedures.
●
The guide of the item shown with the cursor is basically displayed under the screen in the
data terminal.
●
While displaying the menu screen on the controller, the data terminal cannot be operated
temporally. Similarly, the controller cannot be operated during the telex communication
except the operations of TEL DSC CW and DISTRESS keys.
●
Besides the telex communication in ARQ/FEC mode, the data terminal has other functions
such as editing telex messages and the station list, setup of the radio condition, or setup of
the display color of the screen.
●
The communication using ARQ mode can be started with a specific radio station by inputting
the selcal number (ID) and the work frequency.
●
The communication using CFEC mode can be started as the broadcasting by inputting the
work frequency.
●
The communication using SFEC mode can be started as the broadcasting for limited
receivers by inputting the selcal number (group ID) and work frequency.
●
The telex communication channel can be set by specifying ARQ or FEC in the DSC message.
In this case, the telex communication may be started without inputting 9 digits selcal number
(ID) and work frequency because those have been already set by the DSC calling.
●
Up to 20 stations can be registered in the station list.
●
The self-diagnosis of the data terminal is executed from the controller as well as other units.
●
The controller outputs the printing data from the printer connected to the data terminal.
●
The condition of the data terminal such as the startup or the sleep is synchronized to the
controller connected or the system.
●
When the data terminal detects any error(s) concerning to the internal flash memory, the
keyboard, the printer or the connected USB memory, immediately shows the popup screen
and the Information is displayed on the bottom line on the screen until the error is fixed.
4-4
Operation
Menu tree in data terminal
Main Menu
File
Tune
Connect
Service
System
Help
Short-cut
Key
Drop-do wn Ke y
Edit new file
Short-cut
Key
Edit existing file
Rename file
Delete file
Cop y file
Initialize USB
Remo ve USB
Frequency list
ITU channel set
Tx/Rx frequenc y set
Tx tune
Scanning start (stop)
Remarks
Printable
ARQ
CALL
Option
AUTOTELEX
Option
CFEC
SFEC
Call logging history
Printable
Station list
Printable
Station database
Printable
Destination list
Option
Sunspot number
MUF calculation
Clear status win dow
Config
Scan speed
NBDP setup
Software versio n
4-5
Operation
4.2
Basic communications procedure
The following describes basic radio communication procedures.
4.2.1
Turning on the power
CAUTION
Do not turn off the equipment when at sea because the SOLAS Convention
requires keeping watch on distress and safety frequencies at all times.
Always listen to 2187.5 kHz and 8414.5 kHz, and one or more of the following
frequencies; 4207.5 kHz, 6312.0 kHz, 12577.0 kHz, or 16804.5 kHz.
In class B mode, it is necessary to keep watch only on 2187.5 kHz.
■ Procedure ■
11.. Make sure the equipment is connected to a
power source and turn on the breakers on the
power supply.
¾ The controller, transceiver and data terminal
start the internal check.
¾ After the check is finished correctly, the status
display appears and becomes receiving
condition (standby) on the receiving frequency
showing.
Note
When turning on the controller or the
equipment in sleep mode, press
PW R
CONT
key for one second.
Pressing
PW R
CONT
key for 6 seconds
makes the system reset to restart.
When two controllers are connected,
and one controller is turned on from
sleep mode, the status display is
displayed immediately without
checking operations.
The start screen of the data terminal
is as shown at right.
If errors are detected during the
operation check, the message is
displayed. Please inform JRC or our
agent of the error contents.
4-6
Operation
4.2.2
Turning off the power/ Putting into sleep mode
CAUTION
When completely turning off the power to the equipment, turn off the breakers
on the power supply.
■ Procedure ■
Press the
PW R
CONT
key and
DIM
key
simultaneously.
After that, the power-off process is activated
according to the controllers' status.
When using only one controller
Select the desired item below on the
popup screen shown at right
⋅ [OK]:
Turns off the power. (Puts into
sleep (energy saving) mode.)
⋅ [Cancel]: Returns to the previous screen.
When using two controllers
On a controller with access rights, select
the desired item below on the popup
screen shown at right
⋅ [EQP]:
Turns off the power. (Puts into
sleep (energy saving) mode.)
⋅ [CTRL]: Puts the controller into sleep
mode and gives access rights
to another controller.
⋅ [Cancel]: Returns to the previous screen.
On a controller without access rights,
select the desired item below on the
displayed popup screen at right
⋅ [OK]:
Puts one controller into sleep
mode.
⋅ [Cancel]: Returns to the previous screen.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL ITU- 401
RX 4357.0 kHz
TX 4065.0 kHz
OK to sleep the
MF/HF equipment?
[ OK ]
[Cancel]
SIG
NonDST:
WKR scan bands: D R O B O S:
2 4 6 8 12 16MHz E d t D S T:
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL ITU- 401
RX 4357.0 kHz
TX 4065.0 kHz
OK to sleep the MF/HF
equipment, or
only this controller?
SIG [EQP] [CTRL] [Cancel]
NonDST:
WKR scan bands: D R O BO S :
2 4 6 8 12 16MHz EdtDST:
¾
¾
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL ITU- 401
RX 4357.0 kHz
TX 4065.0 kHz
OK to sleep this
controller?
[ OK ]
[Cancel]
SIG
NonDST:
WKR scan bands: D R O BO S :
2 4 6 8 12 16MHz EdtDST:
Note
In sleep mode, the equipment changes to the following statuses.
If all the equipment goes to sleep, the ALM lamp lights green to indicate
the DSC watch keeping receiver is on and operating.
⋅ The POWER lamp of the data terminal blinks.
⋅ If a distress or urgent DSC message is received, the equipment turns on
automatically and sounds an alarm.
Turn off both the AC and DC breakers if turning off the power at the
NBD-2250/2500 Power supply.
⋅
4-7
Operation
4.2.3
Communicating in radiotelephone mode
Use the handset to communicate in radiotelephone mode.
■ Procedure ■
11.. When operating on a controller without
access rights (OCC is displayed), press the
jog dial to obtain the access rights.
Unless the controller with access rights is being
used, the access rights are acquired and the OCC
display on the screen disappears.
22.. Press the TEL key.
¾ The communication mode is set to TEL and
the previous frequency (or the default
frequency at just after turning on) is set.
¾ Pressing the TEL key again turns the
power to the PA on and off.
¾ If the power to the PA is on, ON is displayed
as shown at right.
33.. Set the frequency for making calls in
radiotelephone mode.
Note
When setting a frequency, the screen
becomes operating display as shown
at right.
The frequency is set on the receiving
status in the status display or the
operating display. For details, see
"4.3.1 Setting the communication
frequencies" and "4.3.2 Setting the
communication channels".
See the frequency for making calls
in the appendix "11.4 ITU channel
list (TEL/CW/TLX)".
44.. Adjust the volume of the loudspeaker by
turning the volume control.
55.. Turn the RF GAIN control to an appropriate
reception level.
4-8
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL ITU- 401
RX 4357.0 kHz
TX 4065.0 kHz
SIG
NonDST:
WKR scan bands: DROBOS:
2 4 6 8 12 16MHz EdtDST:
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL I T U - 4 0 2
4360.0
4068.0
Communicating on
TEL Rx: 4360.0/Tx: 4068.0kHz
Tip)Use FUNC to change op area.
[HLD][END]
Operation
66.. Press the
Note
ANT
TUNE
key to tune the antenna.
T blinks if the transmission frequency
is not tuned.
Even if T is not displayed, tune the
antenna before making a call.
T lights during tuning. It goes out
after tuning.
77.. Lift the handset from the cradle.
88.. Press the PTT key to talk.
The TX and ON marks appear on the screen to
show the equipment is transmitting. Releasing the
PTT key returns it to receiving.
Note
Pressing the PTT key turns on the power
to the PA automatically.
99.. When finished communicating, return the
handset to the cradle.
■ Making a radiotelephone call ■
11.. Set a frequency the station to be called is monitoring.
22.. Lift the handset from the cradle.
33.. Press the PTT key, check that TX and ON are displayed and make a call as described
below.
Say the name of the station being called ... Repeat 3 times.
Say "This is..."
Say own ship name ... Repeat 3 times.
If necessary, indicate your working frequency.
"over"
44.. Release the PTT key to listen.
55.. Start communicating according to the response. When changing frequencies, make
sure that no other stations are using the indicated working channel.
Note
When transmitting from your own station, always press the PTT key while talking.
On a simplex channel, always say "over" just before releasing the PTT key.
Always say "out" when terminating communications.
4-9
Operation
4.2.4
Communicating in CW mode
Use a CW keyer to communicate in CW mode.
■ Procedure ■
11.. When operating on a controller without
access rights (OCC is displayed), press the
jog dial to obtain the access rights.
Unless the controller with access rights is being
used, the access rights are acquired and the OCC
display on the screen disappears.
22.. Press the CW key.
¾ The communication mode is set to CW and
the previous frequency (or the default
frequency at just after turning on) is set.
¾ Pressing the CW key again turns the
power to the PA on and off.
¾ If the power to the PA is on, ON is displayed
as shown at right.
33.. Set the frequency for making calls in CW
mode.
Note
- When setting a frequency, the screen
becomes operating display as shown
at right.
The frequency is set on the receiving
status in the status display. For
details, see "4.3.1 Setting the
communication frequencies" and
"4.3.2 Setting the communication
channels".
See the frequency for making calls
in the appendix "11.4 ITU channel
list (TEL/CW/TLX)".
44.. Adjust the volume of the loudspeaker by
turning the volume control.
55.. Turn the RF GAIN control to an appropriate
reception level.
4-10
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
CW
ITU- 401
RX 4182.0 kHz
TX 4182.0 kHz
SIG
NonDST:
WKR scan bands: D R O B O S :
2 4 6 8 12 16MHz EdtDST:
Operation
66.. Press the
Note
ANT
TUNE
key to tune the antenna.
T blinks if the transmission frequency
is not tuned.
Even if T is not displayed, tune the
antenna before making a call.
T lights during tuning. It goes out
after tuning.
77.. Communicate in CW mode using the CW
keyer connected to the KEY jack on the
controller as shown in the figure to the right.
The TX and ON marks appear on the screen to
show the equipment is transmitting.
Note
After keying on, turns on the PA
power automatically.
For the sidetone setting, see "5.3.2
Sound settings".
4-11
Operation
4.2.5
Receiving AM broadcasts
It is possible to listen to the radio in AM mode.
■ Procedure ■
11.. When operating on a controller without
access rights (OCC is displayed), press the
jog dial to obtain the access rights.
Unless the controller with access rights is
being used, the access rights are acquired
and the OCC display on the screen
disappears.
22.. Press the
MENU key, and through
hierarchical menus, select 5. Radio
operation.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL Rx:13077.0/Tx:12230.0kHz
5)Radio operation
1.User channel list
2.ITU channel list
3.Mode
:TEL
4.Receiver
5.Transmitter
0.Back
33.. Move the cursor to 3. Mode, and press
ENT.
Move the cursor to the right as shown in the
figure at right to select a communication mode.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL Rx:13077.0/Tx:12230.0kHz
5)Radio operation
1.User channel list
2.ITU channel list
3.Mode
:TEL
4.Receiver
5.Transmitter
0.Back
44.. Turn the jog dial to select AM, and press
ENT.
The communication mode is set to AM and the
previous frequency (or the default frequency at
just after turning on) is set.
55.. Press the
MENU key twice to return to the
status display and if required, input an AM
broadcast frequency using the numeric keys.
Then press ENT to receive the broadcast.
Note
Adjust the reception level and
volume by turning the VOL and RF
GAIN knobs according to the
reception conditions.
- The AM mode is for reception only so a
transmission frequency is not shown.
Additionally, if AM is selected during
blinking “T” (ATU does not tuned), the
condition remains even after changing
to the AM mode.
4-12
Operation
4.2.6
Communicating in telex mode (TLX)
When communicating in the telex mode, the data terminal is used. In the telex communication,
the ARQ (Automatic Repeat reQuest) mode and FEC (Forward Error Correction) mode are
available to communicate between two stations and to broadcast respectively. Additionally in the
FEC mode, there are two modes of the CFEC (Collective Forward Error Correction) mode for
unspecified receivers and SFEC (Selective Forward Error Correction) mode for specified
receivers, which are selectable according to the purpose.
Attention
After starting the telex communication, always use the data terminal until to stop it even
though the controller can terminate that communication with END option forcibly.
4.2.6.1
ARQ mode operation
To start the ARQ communication, make a call of the station by inputting the SELCAL number (4
digits for the coast station, 5 digits for the ship station or 9 digits) and the work frequency. After
initiating the call, when receiving the response from the called station and the communication
channel is established, the ARQ communication will be available.
■ Procedure ■
11.. If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP
mode…" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard.
The operation of the data
terminal becomes possible in
the telex mode, except when
the controller is used.
22.. On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select Connect Î ARQ with Enter key.
¾ The registered station list is
displayed.
¾ When selecting [Manual] on
this station list, the ID and
frequency or ITU channel
can be input manually.
4-13
Operation
33.. Select the station to be called with the cursor, and press Enter key.
¾ The frequency list of the selected
radio station is displayed.
Name : [Station 01
¾ If the position of the station is
registered, the MUF (maximum
usable frequency) is displayed in the
lowest line as a reference to select
the frequency. Also, the MUF can be
calculated by the menu of Service Î
MUF calculation.
No.
10
Tx.F
4202.5
4205.0
6300.5
6303.0
8396.5
8399.0
12560.0
16785.0
18893.0
22352.0
Frequency list
] ID : [004310123] Loc : [N33ﾟ45' E138ﾟ12']
Rx.F
4202.5
4205.0
6300.5
6303.5
8396.5
8399.0
12560.0
16785.0
18893.0
22352.0
No.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Tx.F
22354.5
25193.0
25208.0
Rx.F
22354.5
25193.0
25208.0
[Set]
[Print]
[Cancel]
MUF: 9MHz, Range: 2537Miles, Sunspot: 14
44.. Select the work frequency with the cursor, and press Enter key.
¾ The selected frequency is set and the
antenna is tuned to the frequency.
¾ The message as shown at right is
displayed to confirm that the channel
is busy.
55.. Select Yes and press Enter key to start the call at the selected frequency.
Calling of the station is started
with the ARQ mode.
[TLX] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz
File
Tune
Connect
S T -A BR YQ
Free sig.
Scanning info
[No scanning]
Calling
USB
Service
STATUS INFO
Send
System
Phasing
Repeat
Help
Traf
Tuner/Tx.POWER
TUNER
:[READY]
Tx.POWER :[HIGH]
Last status message
ARQ: 20 AUG,2010 17:15
Station:[Station 01] ID:[004310123] Loc:[N33ﾟ45'E138ﾟ12']
*Waiting for transmitter ready
*Received TX-READY signal
F10 Stop
66.. When receiving the periodic reply from the called station and the communication
channel is established, th e ARQ communication will be available.
¾ The screen as shown at
right is displayed.
¾ If receiving no response
within one minute, the
calling will be ceased
automatically. In this case,
the same call is inhibited
for about one minute.
[TLX] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz
Station ID:[004310123]
Free sig.
A RA QR Q
USB
TELEX Terminal Window
Calling
Rephasing
Send
Message start...
F2 WRU | F3 Hereis | F4 TMS | F5 Over | F8 F.Send | F10 Stop
4-14
Repeat
Traf
Operation
77.. The characters typed with the keyboard can be transmitted in sequence. And all of the
characters displayed on the screen are printed out on the printer.
¾ In the ARQ mode, it is
possible to alternate the
information sending station
(ISS) and the information
receiving station (IRS).
¾ While “Send” is displayed on
the segment that shows the
operation status, the own
station is ISS and able to
send a message.
¾ After sending a message,
send “+?” to give the sending
right to the IRS.
[TLX] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz
Station ID:[004310123]
Free sig.
USB
TELEX Terminal Window
Calling
Rephasing
Send
A RA QR Q
Repeat
Traf
Message start...
THE
THE
THE
THE
END
QUICK BROWN
QUICK BROWN
QUICK BROWN
QUICK BROWN
OF TEST
FOX
FOX
FOX
FOX
JUMPS
JUMPS
JUMPS
JUMPS
OVER
OVER
OVER
OVER
THE
THE
THE
THE
LAZY
LAZY
LAZY
LAZY
DOG
DOG
DOG
DOG
1234567890.
1234567890.
1234567890.
1234567890.
F2 WRU | F3 Hereis | F4 TMS | F5 Over | F8 F.Send | F10 Stop
¾ While the condition is IRS, the
sending right can be acquired
by pressing F5 Over without
waiting for “+?” from ISS.
Further, refer to the chapter 2
for other function keys.
¾ Besides alphabets and the
figures, following signs can
be input from the keyboard.
- ? : ( ) . , ‘ = / +
Note: As the alphabets, capital
letters only are available.
88.. To finish the communication, press F10 Stop key.
¾ When receiving the reply to the
request for the end of
communication, returns to the
standby condition.
¾ F10 Stop is always available
while communicating regardless
of ISS/ IRS. Note that if
pressing the F10 key during
IRS condition, the station
becomes ISS temporally to
send the end of communication.
¾ When pressing the F10 Stop
key during sending a message,
the sending message buffer is
cleared at once and initiates
the end of communication
process.
¾ When POLL is set at IRS and
the end of communication is
requested by ISS, the IRS can
acquire the sending right
without ending the
communication.
Note
When receiving the ARQ call from another station during standby condition, the
operation under the communication is basically similar.
4-15
Operation
4.2.6.2
CFEC mode operation
（ １ ） Sending with CFEC
Messages can be sent as a broadcast on the selected work frequency using the CFEC mode.
■ Procedure ■
11.. If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP
mode…" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard.
The operation of the data
terminal becomes possible in
the telex mode, except when
the controller is used.
[TEL] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz
File
Tune
Connect
USB
Service
System
Help
STATUS INFO
Scanning info
[No scanning]
Tuner/Tx.POWER
TUNER
:[READY]
Tx.POWER :[HIGH]
Last status message
Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP mode...
22.. On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select Connect Î CFEC with Enter key.
¾ Input the frequency or ITU
channel on the screen as
shown at right.
¾ To input the frequency, press
Enter key to move the cursor to
the right.
¾ To input the ITU channel, select
the ITU channel button and press
Enter key to display the specific
screen as shown at right. Then
press Enter key to move the
cursor to the right.
33.. Input the work frequency or ITU channel, and press Enter key.
¾ The selected frequency is set and the
antenna is tuned to the frequency.
¾ The message as shown at right is
displayed to confirm that the channel
is busy.
4-16
Operation
44.. Select Yes and press Enter key to start the call at the selected frequency.
Sending the phasing signal is
started with the CFEC mode.
55.. After sending the phasing signal for about 15 seconds, the message sending using
the CFEC mode will be available.
The screen as shown at right
is displayed.
66.. The characters typed with the keyboard can be transmitted in sequence. And all of the
characters displayed on the screen are printed out on the printer.
¾ Refer to the chapter 2 for the
function key.
¾ Besides alphabets and the
figures, following signs can
be input from the keyboard.
- ? : ( ) . , ‘ = / +
Note: Only the capital letter
can be used for the
alphabet.
4-17
Operation
77.. To finish the communication, press F10 Stop key.
¾ After sending the end of
communication for about five
seconds, returns to the
standby condition.
¾ When pressing the F10 Stop
key during sending a
message, the sending
message buffer is cleared at
once and initiates the end of
communication process.
[TLX] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz
File
Tune
Connect
S TS -T B- YB Y
Free sig.
Scanning info
[No scanning]
Calling
USB
Service
STATUS INFO
Receive
System
Rephasing
Repeat
Help
Traf
Tuner/Tx.POWER
TUNER
:[READY]
Tx.POWER :[HIGH]
Last status message
CFEC: 20 AUG,2010 17:15
*Waiting for transmitter ready
*Received TX-READY signal
Move the cursor to the item you want with ↑, ↓, →, ← then press Enter.
File manager.
（ ２ ） Receiving CFEC broadcasting
CFEC broadcasting messages can be received on the selected work frequency.
■ Procedure ■
11.. If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP
mode…" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard.
The operation of the data
terminal becomes possible in
the telex mode, except when
the controller is used.
[TEL] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz
File
Tune
Connect
USB
Service
System
Help
STATUS INFO
Scanning info
[No scanning]
Tuner/Tx.POWER
TUNER
:[READY]
Tx.POWER :[HIGH]
Last status message
Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP mode...
22.. On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select Tune Î Tx/Rx frequency set with
Enter key.
¾ The screen as shown at right
is displayed.
¾ To input the frequency, press
Enter key to move the cursor
to the right.
¾ To select the frequency from
the frequency list, select
Tune Î Frequency list and
open the frequency list of
either one of radio stations.
4-18
Operation
33.. Input the receiving frequency of the CFEC broadcasting, and press Enter key.
The antenna is tuned to the frequency
and the message as shown at right is
displayed.
Note
The transmitting frequency is set simultaneously by the above procedure, but in
this case the frequency is meaningless. So selecting Yes and pressing Enter
would be right.
44.. When receiving the phasing signal, initiates the CFEC receiving condition.
The segment of the operation
status shows receiving the
phasing signal.
55.. When receiving the message start code (the carriage return and the line feed),
initiates the message reception.
¾ All of the characters displayed
on the screen are printed out
on the printer.
¾ If detected the character error,
the error correction with the
time-diversity is performed,
but upon the channel quality,
the error would be beyond the
capacity and the error code
(asterisk) would be displayed.
¾ To finish the reception, press
F10 Stop key. Note that, if
receiving the phasing signal
continuously, the CFEC
receiving would be restarted
just after finishing.
Note
If the "Collective FEC receiving” setting (System Î NBDP setup) is off,
neither the CFEC broadcasting nor the SFEC broadcasting are received.
Receiving the CFEC broadcasting can be started even if on the way of the
message because the phasing signal would be interrupted for every 100
characters. Afterwards, the reception of the message starts as soon as
detecting the message start code (the carriage return and the line feed).
4-19
Operation
4.2.6.3
SFEC mode operation
Messages can be sent to the specific stations as a broadcast on the selected work frequency
using the SFEC mode. Additionally, regarding the SFEC reception, refer to the previous section
because it is similar to the CFEC reception.
■ Procedure ■
11.. If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP
mode…" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard.
The operation of the data
terminal becomes possible in
the telex mode, except when
the controller is used.
[TEL] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz
File
Tune
Connect
USB
Service
System
Help
STATUS INFO
Scanning info
[No scanning]
Tuner/Tx.POWER
TUNER
:[READY]
Tx.POWER :[HIGH]
Last status message
Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP mode...
22.. On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select Connect Î SFEC with Enter key.
¾ The registered station list is
displayed.
¾ When selecting [Manual] on
this station list, the ID and
frequency or ITU channel
can be input manually.
No. Station Name
1 Station 01
2 Station 02
3 Station 03
10
Station selection
ID
Location
004310123
N33ﾟ45' E138ﾟ12'
004311234
N37ﾟ22' E135ﾟ51'
431012345
33.. Select the station to be called with the cursor, and press Enter key.
¾ The frequency list of the selected
radio station is displayed.
¾ If the position of the station is
registered, the MUF (maximum
usable frequency) is displayed in
the lowest line as a reference to
select the frequency. Also, the
MUF can be calculated by the
menu of Service Î MUF
calculation.
4-20
F.Sig
DOTDOT
DOTDOT
[Select]
[Manual]
[Cancel]
↓
Operation
44.. Select the work frequency with the cursor, and press Enter key.
¾ The selected frequency is set and the
antenna is tuned to the frequency.
¾ The message as shown at right is
displayed to confirm that the channel
is busy.
55.. Select Yes and press Enter key to start the call at the selected frequency.
¾ The SFEC broadcasting is
started.
¾ First, the phasing signal same
with CFEC mode is sent.
66.. After sending the phasing signal followed by the SELCAL number, the message
sending using the SFEC mode will be available.
The screen as shown at right
is displayed.
[TLX] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz
Station ID:[004310123]
Free sig.
AS RF QE C
TELEX Terminal Window
Calling
Rephasing
Send
USB
Repeat
RQ
Message start...
F3 Hereis | F4 TMS | F8 F.Send | F10 Stop
Note
The following procedure is the same as the CFEC mode.
4-21
Operation
4.2.6.4
Editing telex messages
When communicating in the telex mode, the message file can be sent, which is prepared
beforehand as follows.
■ Procedure ■
11.. If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP
mode…" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard.
The operation of the data
terminal becomes possible in the
telex mode, except when the
controller is used.
[TEL] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz
File
Tune
USB
Connect
Service
System
Help
STATUS INFO
Scanning info
[No scanning]
Tuner/Tx.POWER
TUNER
:[READY]
Tx.POWER :[HIGH]
Last status message
Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP mode...
22.. On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select File Î Edit new file with Enter key.
¾ The editing screen is
displayed as shown at right.
¾ To edit an existing file, select
File Î Edit existing file.
[TLX] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz
Editing telex file:001.TLX
USB
Line:
1 Column: 1 Size:
0 Insert On
[End of File]
F1:Insert Off
F2:Ins_Line
F7:Quit
F3:Block
F8:Save As
F4:Del_Word
F9:Save & Quit
F5:Del_Line
F10: - Others -
33.. Make the message with the keyboard.
¾ Besides alphabets and the figures, following signs can be input from the keyboard.
- ? : ( ) . , ‘ = / +
¾ Only the capital letter can be used for the alphabet.
¾ When the number of characters for each line becomes more than 70 or a specified number,
line feed is automatically inserted.
¾ When pressing the Tab key, inserts the space of the number set by F2 Set tab is inserted.
44.. Press F9 (Save & Quit) key when saving the message the file and finishing editing.
After closing the editing screen, returns to the regular screen.
4-22
Operation
Note
●
The function keys available for the edit screen and the content are as follows.
Group 1
・ F1
： Insert On/Off ···············
・ F2
・ F3
： Ins_Line······················
： Block ··························
・ F4
・ F5
・ F6
・ F7
・ F8
・ F9
： Del_Word ····················
： Del_Line ·····················
：（ N/A）
： Quit ····························
： Save As ······················
： Save & Quit ················
・ F10 ： - Others - ····················
●
Sets the input condition to the insert mode by
pressing it while Insert On is displayed. And sets the
input condition to the overwrite mode by pressing it
while Insert Off is displayed. Current conditions are
indicated on the upper-right corner of the screen.
Add a line to the line of the cursor position.
Indicates the following block menu.
・ Top-marker of block:
Specifies the cursor position for a starting point
of the block.
・ Bottom-marker of block:
Specifies the cursor position for a ending point
of the block.
・ Remove markers:
Releases the specification of the block.
・ Copy Block:
Copies and pastes the character string specified
in the block onto the cursor position.
・ Move block:
Moves the character string specified in the block
to the line position of the cursor.
・ Delete block:
Deletes the character string specified in the
block.
・ Go to the block:
Moves the cursor to the starting point of the
block.
Deletes the word at the cursor position.
Deletes the line at the cursor position.
Finishes editing without saving the message file.
Saves the message file with the new name.
Saves the message file by overwriting and finishes
editing.
Assigns the group 2 to the function keys.
Group 2
・ F1
・ F2
・ F3
： Max Column ················
： Set Tab ·······················
： Undo_Char ··················
・ F4
： Undo_Word ·················
・ F5
： Undo_Line ··················
・ F6
： Merge File ··················
・ F7
・ F8
・ F9
： Find ····························
： Print_out ·····················
： Find/Replace ···············
・ F10 ： - Others - ····················
Specifies the column width of a line.
Specifies the tab position on the edit screen.
Insert the character erased at the end to the cursor
position.
Insert the word erased with F4 Del_Word to the
cursor position.
Insert the line erased with F5 Del_Line to the line of
the cursor position.
Selects an existing message file to merge to the
message file under the edit.
Searches a specified character string.
Prints the message file under the edit.
Searches a specified character string and replaces it
with another character string.
Assigns the group 1 to the function keys.
4-23
Operation
Besides editing messages mentioned above, the following items in the file
menu concerning to the message files are available.
・
Rename file ··········
Changes the name of the file saved in flash
ROM(C:) or USB memory (A:) .
・
Delete file ·············
Deletes the file saved in the flash ROM (C:) or the
USB memory (A:) .
・
Copy file ···············
Copies a file (32kB or less) saved in the flash
ROM (C:) or the USB memory (A:) to another
folder or drive.
・
Initialize USB ········
Formats the attached USB memory (A:) .
・
Remove USB ·········
Unmounts the USB drive (A:) to remove the
attached USB memory.
The maximum size of the message file is 8192 bytes.
The maximum number of the message files saved in the TEXT folder is one
hundred.
When naming or renaming a filename, the space character is unavailable for
the character string.
4-24
Operation
4.3 Setting the radio
This section describes how to set the communication frequencies and how to use the receiver
and transceiver functions.
4.3.1
Setting the communication frequencies
Use the free frequency input mode to input the communication frequencies directly.
■ Procedure ■
11.. In the status display, use the numeric keypad
to input the frequency.
Note
When 1 is input using the numeric
keypad, it appears on the far right as
shown in the screen on the right.
In the user/ITU channel input mode,
press the CH key once or twice to
hide the channel display.
22.. Input numbers to the 0.1 kHz place and
press ENT.
The transmission frequency input mode opens as
shown in the screen at right.
Note
For a simplex frequency, press ENT to
automatically input the same frequency
as the receiving frequency to complete
communication frequency settings.
33.. Input the transmission frequency in the
same way as the reception frequency.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL
-----.1 kHz
TX 2331.5 kHz
RX
SIG
NonDST:
WKR scan bands: DROBOS:
2 4 6 8 12 16MHz EdtDST:
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL
12345.0 kHz
TX -----.- kHz
RX
SIG
NonDST:
WKR scan bands: DROBOS:
2 4 6 8 12 16MHz EdtDST:
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL
12345.0 kHz
TX ---12.3 kHz
RX
SIG
NonDST:
WKR scan bands: DROBOS:
2 4 6 8 12 16MHz EdtDST:
44.. Input numbers to the 0.1 kHz place and
press ENT.
The communication frequency settings are
complete and the screen shows the operating
display.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL
12345.0
12345.0
Communicating on
TEL Rx:12345.0/Tx:12345.0kHz
Tip)Use FUNC to change op area.
[HLD][END]
Note
Turning the jog dial on the status display changes the reception frequency on
the 0.1 kHz scale. For simplex frequencies, the transmission frequency is
changed at the same time.
The above operation is also available on the transceiver setting screen of the
operating display.
The above operation is unavailable in the telex mode. The telex frequency is
set with the menu of the data terminal, as Tune Î Tx/Rx frequency set.
4-25
Operation
4.3.2
Setting the communication channels
Besides the free frequencies described previously, ITU channel mode and user channel modes
can also be set. The ITU channel mode is mode for using channels based on the international
standard and is built-in to the equipment. The user channel mode is the mode for using channels
on pre-registered frequencies. These modes can be used according to the operations.
(1) Selecting a frequency and channel input mode
■ Procedure ■
11.. Set the screen of the status display or the
operating display.
The operating display at right shows free frequency
mode.
22..
Press the CH key.
As shown below, each time the CH key is pressed the mode changes in order from the free
frequency mode, ITU channel mode, to the user channel mode.
CH
CH
(Free frequency input mode)
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL I T U - 4 0 2
4360.0
4068.0
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
CH
TEL U 0 1 - 0 0 1
4357.0
4065.0
Communicating on
TEL Rx: 4360.0/Tx: 4068.0kHz
Communicating on
TEL Rx: 4357.0/Tx: 4065.0kHz
Tip)Use FUNC to change op area.
[HLD][END]
Tip)Use FUNC to change op area.
[HLD][END]
(ITU channel mode)
Note
4-26
(User channel mode)
If changed to the ITU channel mode, the communication mode of the free
frequency input mode and the previous (or lowest) ITU channel number are
applied.
The above operation is unavailable in the telex mode.
If the communication mode is changed by pressing the TEL, DSC, or CW keys,
the free frequency input mode is set.
Operation
(2) Setting the ITU channels
■ Procedure ■
11.. After setting the TEL, DSC or CW modes,
press the CH key to set the display to the
ITU channel mode.
22.. Input the channel by using the numeric
keypad.
Note
When 4 is input using the numeric
keypad, it appears on the far right
as shown in the screen on the right.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL I T U - 4
4360.0
4068.0
Communicating on
TEL Rx: 4360.0/Tx: 4068.0kHz
Tip)Use FUNC to change op area.
[HLD][END]
33.. Input the rest of the digits and press ENT.
The input ITU channel frequency is displayed
and the settings are complete.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL I T U - 4 0 1
4357.0
4065.0
Communicating on
TEL Rx: 4357.0/Tx: 4065.0kHz
Tip)Use FUNC to change op area.
[HLD][END]
Note
See the appendix "11.4 ITU channel list (TEL/CW/TLX)" for a list of
pre-installed ITU channels and their frequencies.
Besides doing settings with the numeric keypad, settings can also be done with
the jog dial.
For DSC mode, normally perform the above procedure to receive the routine
message. Furthermore, when sending a DSC message, the calling frequency is
set via the menu automatically and the above procedure is not needed.
The above operation is unavailable in the telex mode. The ITU channel in the
telex mode is set with the controller menu 5.2 ITU channel list, or the data
terminal menu operation, as Tune Î ITU channel set.
4-27
Operation
(3) Setting user channels
A total of 20 groups with 20 channels set to each group (i.e. 400 channels) can be registered on
the equipment. This section explains how to set channels that are already registered.
■ Procedure ■
11.. Use the CH key to set the display to the user
channel mode status display.
22.. Pressing ENT causes the channel group
number to blink so a channel group can be
input.
Use the numeric keypad or jog dial to input the
number of a registered group.
Note
When 2 is input using the numeric
keypad, it appears on the far right
as shown in the screen on the right.
33.. After inputting a group number, pressing ENT
causes the channel number to blink so a user
channel can be input.
Use the numeric keypad or jog dial to input the
number of a registered channel.
Note
When 3 is input using the numeric
keypad, it appears on the far right
as shown in the screen on the right.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL U 2 0 - 3
4357.0
4065.0
Communicating on
TEL Rx: 4357.0/Tx: 4065.0kHz
Tip)Use FUNC to change op area.
[HLD][END]
44.. Input the rest of the digits and press ENT.
¾ The input user channel frequency is
displayed and the settings are complete.
¾ The group name is displayed for 3 seconds
after the settings are done.
Note
4-28
Channels can be set directly in the status display or the operating display by
using the numeric keypad or the jog dial without setting a channel group. After
inputting with the numeric keypad, press ENT.
See "5.4 Registering user channels" for how to register frequencies to user
channels.
The user channel of the telex mode is set with the menu of the data terminal,
as Tune Î Frequency list.
Operation
(4) Using channel lists
Besides the procedure above, user channels (except the telex mode) and ITU channels can also
be set from the channel lists (5.1 User channel list or 5.2 ITU channel list). This section explains
how to set channels that are already registered from the user channel list.
■ Procedure ■
11.. Press the MENU key, and through
hierarchical menus, select 5. Radio
operation.
5) Radio operation
1.User channel list
2.ITU channel list
3.Mode
:TEL
4.Receiver
5.Transmitter
0.Back
22.. Select 1. User channel list and press ENT.
The user channel list index (group list) as
shown at right is displayed.
33.. Select the intended channel group and press
ENT.
The user channel list as shown at right is
displayed.
5.1)User channel list (index)
No CH group name
Type
01 JRC Tokyo
TEL
02 Pacific ABC
CW
03
04
05
06
07
08
5.1)User channel list (table)
Name: JRC Tokyo
Type: TEL
CHNo
Rx[kHz]
Tx[kHz]
Mode
001
4357.0
4065.0
TEL
002
4360.0
4068.0
TEL
003
4363.0
4071.0
TEL
004
4366.0
4074.0
TEL
005
4369.0
4077.0
TEL
006
4372.0
4080.0
TEL
44.. Select the channel to set and press ENT.
The user channel settings are complete, the
status display is displayed.
4-29
Operation
4.3.3
Setting the automatic gain control (AGC)
■ Procedure ■
11.. Press the
MENU key, and through
hierarchical menus, select 5.4 Receiver.
22.. Select 1. Auto gain control and press ENT,
when the cursor moves to the right use the jog
dial to select Slow, Fast, or OFF.
After selecting and pressing ENT, the
settings are complete.
5.4)Receiver
1.Auto gain control
2.Noise reduction
3.Attenuation
4.Clarifier
5.Squelch
6.CW bandwidth
7.Scan
0.Back
:Slow
:OFF
:OFF
:+000Hz
:OFF
:Narrow
5.4)Receiver
1.Auto gain control
2.Noise reduction
3.Attenuation
4.Clarifier
5.Squelch
6.CW bandwidth
7.Scan
0.Back
:Fast
:OFF
:OFF
:+000Hz
:OFF
:Narrow
The same settings can be done by pressing and holding the FUNC key and the
Note
5 AGC key at the same time.
4.3.4
Setting the noise reduction (NR)
■ Procedure ■
11.. Press the
MENU key, and through
hierarchical menus, after 5.4 Receiver
appears, move the cursor to 2. Noise
reduction.
22.. Press ENT to move the cursor to the right,
then use the jog dial to select NR1, NR2,
BC, or OFF.
After selecting and pressing ENT, the
settings are complete.
Note
4-30
The various settings are shown below.
・ NR1： Noise reduction (low)
・ NR2： Noise reduction (high)
・ BC： Beat canceller
The same settings can be done by
pressing and holding the FUNC key
and the 3 NR key at the same time.
This function is invalid in DSC mode or
telex mode. Moreover, the beat
canceller becomes invalid in CW mode.
5.4)Receiver
1.Auto gain control
2.Noise reduction
3.Attenuation
4.Clarifier
5.Squelch
6.CW bandwidth
7.Scan
0.Back
:Slow
:OFF
:OFF
:+000Hz
:OFF
:Narrow
5.4)Receiver
1.Auto gain control
2.Noise reduction
3.Attenuation
4.Clarifier
5.Squelch
6.CW bandwidth
7.Scan
0.Back
:Slow
:NR1
:OFF
:+000Hz
:OFF
:Narrow
Operation
4.3.5
Setting the attenuation (ATT)
■ Procedure ■
11.. Press the
MENU key, and through
hierarchical menus, after 5.4 Receiver
appears, move the cursor to 3.
Attenuation.
22.. Press ENT to move the cursor to the right,
then use the jog dial to select 6dB, 12dB,
18dB, or OFF.
After selecting and pressing ENT, the
settings are complete.
5.4)Receiver
1.Auto gain control
2.Noise reduction
3.Attenuation
4.Clarifier
5.Squelch
6.CW bandwidth
7.Scan
0.Back
:Slow
:OFF
:OFF
:+000Hz
:OFF
:Narrow
5.4)Receiver
1.Auto gain control
2.Noise reduction
3.Attenuation
4.Clarifier
5.Squelch
6.CW bandwidth
7.Scan
0.Back
:Slow
:OFF
:6dB
:+000Hz
:OFF
:Narrow
The same settings can be done by pressing and holding the FUNC key and the
Note
4 ATT key at the same time.
4.3.6
Setting the clarifier
■ Procedure ■
11.. Press the
MENU key, and through
hierarchical menus, after 5.4 Receiver
appears, move the cursor to 4. Clarifier.
22.. Press ENT to move the cursor to the right, then
use the jog dial or numeric keypad to select a
value in the range of -200 to +200 Hz.
After inputting and pressing ENT, the settings
are complete.
Note
5.4)Receiver
1.Auto gain control
2.Noise reduction
3.Attenuation
4.Clarifier
5.Squelch
6.CW bandwidth
7.Scan
0.Back
:Slow
:OFF
:OFF
:+000Hz
:OFF
:Narrow
5.4)Receiver
1.Auto gain control
2.Noise reduction
3.Attenuation
4.Clarifier
5.Squelch
6.CW bandwidth
7.Scan
0.Back
:Slow
:OFF
:OFF
:+008Hz
:OFF
:Narrow
When using the numeric keypad,
input "+" with the 1 CLAR key and "-"
with the 2 S C AN key.
Pressing and holding the FUNC key
and the 1 CLA R key at the same time
opens a popup screen. The same
settings can be done here.
This function is invalid in the DSC
mode or the telex mode.
4-31
Operation
4.3.7
Setting the squelch level
■ Procedure ■
11.. Press the
MENU key, and through
hierarchical menus, after 5.4 Receiver
appears, move the cursor to 5. Squelch.
22.. Press ENT to move the cursor to the right,
then use the jog dial or numeric keypad to
input a value in the range of 000 to 100.
After inputting and pressing ENT, the settings
are complete.
Note
4.3.8
5.4)Receiver
1.Auto gain control
2.Noise reduction
3.Attenuation
4.Clarifier
5.Squelch
6.CW bandwidth
7.Scan
0.Back
:Slow
:OFF
:OFF
:+000Hz
:OFF
:Narrow
5.4)Receiver
1.Auto gain control
2.Noise reduction
3.Attenuation
4.Clarifier
5.Squelch
6.CW bandwidth
7.Scan
0.Back
:Slow
:OFF
:OFF
:+000Hz
:012
:Narrow
Setting the value to 000 automatically
displays it as OFF.
This function is invalid in the DSC
mode or the telex mode.
Setting the CW bandwidth
■ Procedure ■
11.. Press the
MENU key, and through
hierarchical menus, after 5.4 Receiver
appears, move the cursor to 6. CW
bandwidth.
22.. Press ENT to move the cursor to the right,
then use the jog dial to select Wide or
Narrow.
After inputting and pressing ENT, the settings
are complete.
Note
4-32
This function is enabled in CW mode
only.
5.4)Receiver
1.Auto gain control
2.Noise reduction
3.Attenuation
4.Clarifier
5.Squelch
6.CW bandwidth
7.Scan
0.Back
:Slow
:OFF
:OFF
:+000Hz
:OFF
:Narrow
5.4)Receiver
1.Auto gain control
2.Noise reduction
3.Attenuation
4.Clarifier
5.Squelch
6.CW bandwidth
7.Scan
0.Back
:Slow
:OFF
:OFF
:+000Hz
:OFF
:Narrow
Operation
4.3.9
Scanning the Rx frequencies
（１）
Scanning of channels in TEL/DSC/CW mode
The scanning of channels in the TEL/DSC/CW mode is started with the controller.
■ Procedure ■
11.. Press the
5.4)Receiver
MENU key, and through
hierarchical menus, after 5.4 Receiver
appears, move the cursor to 7. Scan.
22.. Press ENT to confirm the selection.
The group list as shown at right is displayed.
Note
The previous scan can be restarted
by pressing and holding the FUNC
key and then pressing the
2 SCAN key on the status display.
If the user channel is not registered,
scan cannot be done so the screen
shown at right is not displayed.
33.. Select the channel group to scan with the
cursor and press ENT.
The popup screen as shown at right is
displayed.
Note
If the popup screen shown at right
is displayed during scanning, Stop
appears instead of Execute.
44.. Select 1. Execute and press ENT, the screen
at right is displayed and scanning starts.
¾ To check the registered channels in the
channel group, select 2. User channel list
and press ENT.
¾ To change the scanning speed, select 3.
Scan speed (sec) and press ENT. The setting
range is 0.3 to 9.9 seconds, the same as
TEL/DSC/CW.
Note
1.Auto gain control
2.Noise reduction
3.Attenuation
4.Clarifier
5.Squelch
6.CW bandwidth
7.Scan
0.Back
5.4.7)Scan
No CH group name
01 JRC Tokyo
02 Pacific ABC
03
04
05
06
07
08
:Slow
:OFF
:OFF
:+000Hz
:OFF
:Narrow
Type
TEL
CW
5.4.7)Scan
No CH
group name
Type
1. Execute
01 JRC
Tokyochannel list
TEL
2. User
ABC
02 Pacific
3. Scan speed
(sec) CW
03
04
TEL
DSC
CW
05
3.0
0.3
3.0
06
07
08
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
JRC Tokyo
U01- 001
TEL
4357.0 kHz
TX -----.- kHz
RX
SIG
NonDST:
WKR scan bands: DROBOS:
2 4 6 8 12 16MHz EdtDST:
Scanning can be done regardless of the squelch being set to open or close.
When pressing the PTT or keying the CW keyer, or when squelch is opened
after closing condition, scanning stops momentarily and the icon starts
blinking. In this case the scanning can be restarted by pressing ENT.
To stop scanning, press the CANCEL key.
When scanning to receive routine DSC calls, set the scan speed to 0.3
seconds within 6 channels.
Note: If too many channels are being scanned, it may not catch the reception.
4-33
Operation
（２）
Scanning of channels in telex mode
The scanning of channels in the telex mode is started with the data terminal.
■ Procedure ■
11.. If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP
mode…" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard.
The operation of the data
terminal becomes possible in
the telex mode, except when
the controller is used.
[TEL] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz
File
Tune
USB
Connect
Service
System
Help
STATUS INFO
Scanning info
[No scanning]
Tuner/Tx.POWER
TUNER
:[READY]
Tx.POWER :[HIGH]
Last status message
Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP mode...
22.. On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select Tune Î Scanning start with Enter
key.
The registered station list is
displayed.
33.. Select the radio station having the channel group to be scanned with the cursor, and
press Enter key.
The antenna is tuned to the
every frequency registered in
the selected radio station. The
screen at right is displayed
while tuning the antenna.
44.. After completing the antenna tuning, scanning starts.
¾ The screen as shown at right
is displayed while scanning.
¾ When receiving a call by the
ARQ or FEC mode, scanning
stops and the communication
starts. After finishing the
communication, scanning
restarts automatically.
¾ The scanning speed can be
changed with the menu on the
regular screen, as System Î
Scan speed.
¾ When breaking the scanning,
select Tune Î Scanning stop.
[TLX] Tx=-----.-kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz
File
Tune
USB
Connect
Calling
S TS -T B- YB Y
Free sig.
Scanning info
No.
Station:[Station 01
01
Location:[N33ﾟ45'E138ﾟ12']
Last status message
Service
STATUS INFO
Receive
Rephasing
ID:[004310123]
F.Sig:[DOTDOT]
System
Repeat
Help
Traf
Tuner/Tx.POWER
TUNER
:[-----]
Tx.POWER :[HIGH]
Move the cursor to the item you want with ↑, ↓, →, ← then press Enter.
File manager.
4-34
Operation
4.3.10
Reducing the Tx power
■ Procedure ■
11.. Press the
MENU key, and through
5.5)Transmitter
hierarchical menus, select 5.5
1.Power
:High
2.Tune power
:Normal
3.Auto tune start :ON
Transmitter.
0.Back
22.. Select 1. Power and press ENT to move
5.5)Transmitter
the cursor to the right, then use the jog dial
to select Medium or Low.
After selecting and pressing ENT, the
settings are complete.
Note
4.3.11
0.Back
The same settings can be done by pressing and holding the FUNC key and the
9 PW
RDC
1.Power
:Low
2.Tune power
:Normal
3.Auto tune start :ON
key at the same time.
When the Tx power is reduced, M or L is displayed on the screen.
Setting the antenna tuning power
■ Procedure ■
On the 5.5 Transmitter menu mentioned above, select the 2. Tune power and press ENT
to move the cursor to the right, then select a value from 0 to 3 with the jog dial.
¾ The antenna tune output grows larger by about 5W step.
¾ The factory default setting is 0 (Normal).
¾ After selecting and pressing ENT, the settings are complete.
4.3.12
Setting the Auto Tune Start (ATS) function
■ Procedure ■
On the 5.5 Transmitter menu mentioned above, select the 3. Auto tune start and press
ENT to move the cursor to the right, then set to ON or OFF with the jog dial.
¾ After setting to ON, when pressing the PTT key under the following condition in TEL mode,
the antenna tuner starts tuning automatically.
When the Tx frequency is untuned, or
when the PA power is not turned on, i.e. the ON is not displayed.
¾ This ATS setting data is saved in the controller. Therefore if two controllers are connected,
this function can be set to the controllers respectively.
4-35
Operation
4.4 Basic DSC operations
When calling stations, the DSC is also available for a routine, safety, urgency call, or a distress
alert. This section describes basics of how to use the DSC to make routine calls.
4.4.1
Routine calls to an individual station
For radiotelephone or telex communication, a DSC routine call to the station to be called can be
made as follows.
■ Procedure ■
11.. On the status display or operation display,
holding down the MENU key, press 1 CLAR key
to open “1. DSC non-distress call”.
The screen as shown at right is displayed. The
calling FRQ of 2177.0 kHz is the prescribed default
value. But the working FRQ (MF) is rewritable.
Note
[Call]
[Preview]
[Cancel]
If no data is shown in the working FRQ field
just after turning on, please contact JRC or
our agency to register the nonvolatile data.
In this case, the input MF data is stored
temporarily as the volatile data.
22.. Input the destination address.
- If inputting the 9 digits MMSI manually, use
the numeric keypad or the jog dial, or
- If the DSC call list is already prepared, press
ENT to open the station list as shown at right
and select the receiver from the list.
33.. The cursor is focused on the Call. To make
a call without changing the parameters,
press ENT.
- To change the DSC calling frequency, select the
Calling FRQ and press ENT to open the DSC call
list as shown at right, if already prepared. But in
this case if inputting manually, press CANCEL
key to close the list and, input the proper DSC
frequencies in conformity with regulations.
- After changing the DSC calling frequency on HF,
the working frequency is automatically selected
within upto 10 seconds. However if no frequency
is detected or if another frequency is needed,
manually inputting the frequency is also
available.
- To check the details of the message, press
ENT on the Preview menu to open the screen
as shown at right (bottom).
4-36
1)DSC non-distress call
Call type :[RTN/Indv/TEL
Address
:[
Calling FRQ:[ 2177.0kHz]
Working FRQ:[ 2150.0kHz]
1)DSC non-distress call
Call type :[RTN/Indv/TEL ]
No Station name
MMSI
01 JRC MITAKA1
123456789
02 JRC MITAKA2
431012345
03 JRC MITAKA3
431123456
04 JRC MITAKA4
431234567
05 JRC MITAKA5
431000123
06 JRC MITAKA6
004310014
07 JRC MITAKA7
431888888
1)DSC non-distress call
Call type :[RTN/Indv/TEL
Address
:[123456789]
Calling FRQ:[ 2177.0kHz]
Working FRQ:[ 2150.0kHz]
[Call]
[Preview]
[Cancel]
1)DSC non-distress call
Call type :[RTN/Indv/TEL ]
JRC MITAKA1
123456789
No RX[kHz] TX[kHz] Category
01
2177.0 2177.0 RTN
02
4208.0 4208.0 RTN
03
4208.5 4208.5 RTN
04
4209.0 4209.0 RTN
05
6313.0 6313.0 RTN
06
6313.5 6313.5 RTN
1)DSC non-distress call
Format
:Individual
Address
:123456789
Category
:Routine
Self-ID
:431001234
Telecommand1:Radiotelephone
Telecommand2:No information
Working FRQ :Tx 2150.0kHz
Rx 2150.0kHz
[Call]
[Return]
[Cancel]
Operation
44.. The operating display is appeared and
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
initiates the DSC call.
After checking the channel free condition, sends
the message and waits for the acknowledgement.
Note
During waiting for the acknowledgement,
the handling menus are available for
the following purposes.
Note) To focus the cursor on it, use
FUNC key to move the active screen
area.
DSC
2177.0
2177.0
TxTO:123456789|IND|RTN
Waiting for CH free
Call-F:Rx 2177.0/Tx 2177.0kHz
TEL
:Rx 2150.0/Rx 2150.0kHz
[RTRY][INF][HLD][END]
- RTRY ... Resends the message.
- INF ...... Indicates the message contents.
- HLD ..... Makes the event on hold.
- END .... Terminates the event.
55.. When receiving the acknowledgement
the ALM lamp starts blinking, and the
receiving alarm gradually grows louder.
¾ Pressing CANCEL key or ENT silences the
alarm.
¾ The radiotelephone frequency is set and the
antenna is tuned automatically.
66.. When requested the radiotelephone
communication, start the communication
with the handset.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
DSC
2177.0
2177.0
RxID:123456789|IND|RTN|ACK
Acknowledged(00.2min)
Rx FRQ: 2177.0kHz
TEL
:Rx 2150.0/Tx 2150.0kHz
Press CANCEL to silence alarm.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL
2150.0
2150.0
RxID:123456789|IND|RTN|ACK
Ready to talk(00.2min)
RX FRQ: 2177.0kHz
TEL
:Rx 2150.0/Tx 2150.0kHz
[INF][HLD][END]
Note
After completing the routine individual call where the ARQ or FEC is specified,
the telex mode is set to the equipment. Then the telex communication can be
started with the data terminal.
If the MMSI of the coast station is input at Address, the working frequency is
specified by the coast station. Thus the Working FRQ line is disappeared.
If the receiver is unable to comply with the call, own station may receive one of
the following acknowledgements. (* are coast stations only) In this case, wait
and retry the call again later, if possible, according to the message.
No reason/ No reason given
No operator/ No operator available
Congestion/ Congestion at maritime switching centre *
Temp no operator/ Operator temporarily unavailable
Busy/ Busy
EQP disabled/ Equipment disabled
Queue/ Queue indication
Unable FRQ/ Unable to use proposed channel
Barred/ Station barred
Unable mode/ Unable to use proposed channel
4-37
Operation
4.4.2
Receiving routine individual calls
When receiving an individual DSC call from a coast or ship station, according to the message,
perform the following procedures as appropriate.
■ Procedure ■
11.. The screen at right is displayed, and the
ALM lamp blinks and the alarm grows
louder gradually.
¾ The example message contains the following
information.
- Message type: Routine individual call
- Caller's MMSI: 123456789
¾ If no procedure exists, starts operating the
received message automatically.
22.. Press the CANCEL key or ENT to stop the
alarm, then the screen at right is displayed.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
DSC
2177.0
2177.0
RxID:123456789|IND|RTN
Waiting to send ACK(00.3min)
RX FRQ: 2177.0kHz
TEL
:Rx 2150.0/Tx 2150.0kHz
Press CANCEL to silence alarm.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
DSC
2177.0
2177.0
RxID:123456789|IND|RTN
Waiting to send ACK(00.3min)
RX FRQ: 2177.0kHz
TEL
:Rx 2150.0/Tx 2150.0kHz
[ACK][NCK][NEW][INF][HLD][END]
33.. Press FUNC key or ENT to move the focused
screen to the operation control screen and
select the option to handle the procedure.
Options shown at right are as follows.
ACK ....... Sends the acknowledgement.
NCK
Sends a reply as “unable to comply”.
Note) Select the unable reason on the
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
DSC
2177.0
2177.0
RxID:123456789|IND|RTN
Waiting to send ACK(00.3min)
RX FRQ: 2177.0kHz
TEL
:Rx 2150.0/Tx 2150.0kHz
[ACK][NCK][NEW][INF][HLD][END]
popup screen at right.
NEW ...... Sends acknowledgement with a new channel.
INF ........ Indicates the receiving message.
HLD ....... Makes the procedure on hold.
END ...... Terminates the procedure.
44.. When sending the acknowledgement for
communication, select ACK and press ENT.
¾ Instead of selecting ACK, lifting the handset
from the cradle is also available.
¾ The equipment waits for the channel free
condition as shown at right. After checking it,
the acknowledgement is sent immediately.
4-38
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
DSC
2177.0
2177.0
TxTO:123456789|IND|RTN|ACK
Waiting for CH free
Call-F:Rx 2177.0/Tx 2177.0kHz
TEL
:Rx 2150.0/Tx 2150.0kHz
[RTRY][INF][HLD][END]
Operation
55.. After sending an acknowledgement, the
working frequency is set to communicate.
In TEL mode, start communicating using the
handset.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL
2150.0
2150.0
TxTO:123456789|IND|RTN|ACK
Acknowledged(00.5min)
Call-F:Rx 2177.0/Tx 2177.0kHz
TEL
:Rx 2150.0/Tx 2150.0kHz
[RTRY][INF][HLD][END]
Note
After completing the DSC call sequence specifying the ARQ or FEC, the telex
mode is set to the equipment. Then the telex communication can be started
with the data terminal.
If the receiving call is not the above mentioned call which requests TEL or
TLX communication but a polling call, the screen as follows is shown and, the
ALM lamp blinks and the alarm grows louder gradually. In this case, after
silencing the alarm, select ACK to acknowledge it.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
DSC
2177.0
2189.5
RxID:001234567|IND|RTN POLL
Waiting to send ACK(00.5min)
RX FRQ: 2177.0kHz
[ACK][INF][HLD][END]
Additionally note that if it is received while the 7.5.1.3 Polling call of the
Automatic ACK menu is set to ON, and there is no active procedure, this call
can be acknowledged automatically.
4-39
Operation
4.4.3
Routine group calls
For radiotelephone or FEC broadcasting, a DSC routine call to a group of ships is available.
■ Procedure ■
11.. On the menu “1. DSC non-distress call”
mentioned above, set the Call type on the
menu shown at right to RTN/Group/TEL or
RTN/Group/FEC.
1)DSC non-distress call
Call type :[RTN/Group/TEL ]
Address
:[
Calling FRQ:[ 2177.0kHz]
Working FRQ:[ 2150.0kHz]
[Call]
22.. Input the Address, and frequency if required.
And then press ENT on the Call to start
sending the group call.
frequency is set immediately.
In TEL mode, start broadcasting using the
handset.
[Cancel]
1)DSC non-distress call
Call type :[RTN/Group/TEL ]
Address
:[012345678]
Calling FRQ:[ 2177.0kHz]
Working FRQ:[ 2150.0kHz]
[Call]
33.. After finishing the transmission, the working
[Preview]
[Preview]
[Cancel]
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL
2150.0
2150.0
TxTO:012345678|GRP|RTN
Ready for broadcast(00.5min)
Call-F:Rx 2177.0/Tx 2177.0kHz
TEL
:Rx -----.-/Tx 2150.0kHz
[RTRY][INF][HLD][END]
Note
4.4.4
After completing the group call where the FEC is specified, the telex mode is set
to the equipment. Then the telex communication can be started with the data
terminal.
Receiving routine group calls
■ Procedure ■
The screen at right is displayed, and the
ALM lamp blinks and the alarm grows louder
gradually.
If no procedure exists, starts operating the
received message, i.e. the specified working
frequency is set automatically. Then press
CANCEL to silence alarm and listen to the
broadcasting.
Note
4-40
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL
2150.0
2150.0
RxID:123456789|GRP|RTN
Ready for listening(00.5min)
RX FRQ: 2177.0kHz
TEL
:RX 2150.0/TX -----.-kHz
[INF][HLD][END]
When receiving the group call where the FEC is specified, the telex mode is set to
the equipment. Then receive the telex broadcasting with the data terminal.
Operation
4.5 Emergency calls
(DSC distress/urgency/safety calls)
In emergency, the DSC is available for distress, urgency, or safety calls. For safety and urgency
calls, either individual calls or area calls is selectable for the type of call. For distress alerts,
either sending after entering the nature of distress or frequency, or not entering anything is
available. In both cases, pressing the DISTRESS key is required to send the distress alert.
4.5.1
Safety or urgency calls to an individual station
■ Procedure ■
The procedure to send the safety or urgency
individual call is similar to the routine call except
selecting the call type to SAF/Indv/TEL or
1)DSC non-distress call
Call type :[SAF/Indv/TEL
Address
:[
Calling FRQ:[ 2187.5kHz]
Working FRQ:[ 2182.0kHz]
URG/Indv/TEL (instead of TEL, ARQ or FEC also
available) and normally using the distress and
safety frequencies prior to other frequencies.
Note
4.5.1.1
(1)
[Call]
[Preview]
[Cancel]
- Both calls of the safety test and the safety position request are described below.
- When calling a coast station with requesting the working frequency, input “0” in
the Tx and Rx frequency input field to send the own position data.
Special safety individual calls
Safety test calls
■ Procedure ■
11.. Select SAF/Indv/Test in the Call type field
and input address.
1)DSC non-distress call
Call type :[SAF/Indv/Test ]
Address
:[
Calling FRQ:[ 2187.5kHz]
Also change the Calling FRQ if needed.
[Call]
22.. Press ENT on the Call to start sending
the safety test call.
After checking the channel free, the safety
test call is sent and the screen at right is
displayed.
[Preview]
[Cancel]
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
DSC
2187.5
2187.5
TxTO:123456789|IND|SAF Test
Waiting for ACK(00.2min)
Call-F:Rx 2187.5/Tx 2187.5kHz
[RTRY][INF][HLD][END]
4-41
Operation
33.. When the acknowledgement is received,
the ALM lamp blinks and the alarm grows
louder. After silencing it with CANCEL key,
the screen becomes as shown at right.
The safety test call process is now complete.
However note that even though the call is sent
normally, the acknowledgement may not be
received from the called station for some reason.
(2)
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
DSC
2187.5
2187.5
RxID:123456789|IND|SAF Test|ACK
Acknowledged(00.2min)
RX FRQ: 2187.5kHz
[INF][HLD][END]
Safety position request calls
■ Procedure ■
11.. Select SAF/Indv/PosRQ in the Call type
field and input address.
1)DSC non-distress call
Call type :[SAF/Indv/PosRQ]
Address
:[
Calling FRQ:[ 2187.5kHz]
Also change the Calling FRQ if needed.
[Call]
22.. Press ENT on the Call to start sending
the safety position request call.
After checking the channel free, the safety
position request call is sent and the screen
at right is displayed.
[Preview]
[Cancel]
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
DSC
2187.5
2187.5
TxTO:123456789|IND|SAF POS
Waiting for ACK(00.2min)
Call-F:Rx 2187.5/Tx 2187.5kHz
[RTRY][INF][HLD][END]
33.. When the acknowledgement is received,
the ALM lamp blinks and the alarm grows
louder. After silencing it with CANCEL key,
the screen becomes as shown at right.
The position data of the station is indicated in
the Position field usually, and this procedure
is complete. However note that even though
the call is sent normally, the acknowledgement
may not be received from the called station for
some reason.
4-42
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
DSC
2187.5
2187.5
RxID:123456789|IND|SAF POS|ACK
Acknowledged(00.2min)
RX FRQ: 2187.5kHz
Position:21ﾟ28'N/157ﾟ59'W
[INF][HLD][END]
Operation
4.5.2
Receiving safety or urgency individual calls
When receiving an individual DSC call from a coast or ship station, according to the message,
perform the following procedures as appropriate.
■ Procedure ■
The screen at right is displayed, and the ALM
lamp blinks and the alarm grows louder gradually.
¾ If no procedure exists, starts operating the
received message automatically.
¾ Basically similar to the routine individual call
except normally using the distress and safety
frequencies prior to other frequencies.
4.5.2.1
(1)
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL
2182.0
2182.0
RxID:123456789|IND|SAF
Waiting to send ACK(00.3min)
RX FRQ: 2187.5kHz
TEL
:Rx 2182.0/Tx 2182.0kHz
Press CANCEL to silence alarm.
Receiving special safety individual calls
Safety test calls
■ Procedure ■
The screen at right is displayed, and the ALM
lamp blinks and the alarm grows louder gradually.
¾ If received while the 7.5.1.1 Test call of the
Automatic ACK menu is set to ON and there is
no active procedure, this call can be
acknowledged automatically.
¾ To acknowledge manually, after silencing the
alarm with CANCEL key, select ACK to start
sending procedure.
(2)
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
DSC
2187.5
2187.5
RxID:123456789|IND|SAF Test
Waiting to send ACK(00.2min)
RX FRQ: 2187.5kHz
[ACK][INF][HLD][END]
Safety position request calls
■ Procedure ■
The screen at right is displayed, and the ALM
lamp blinks and the alarm grows louder gradually.
¾ If received while the 7.5.1.2 Position RQ call of
the Automatic ACK menu is set to ON and there
is no active procedure, this call can be
acknowledged automatically.
¾ To acknowledge manually, after silencing the
alarm with CANCEL key, select ACK to start
sending procedure.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
DSC
2187.5
2187.5
RxID:123456789|IND|SAF POS
Waiting to send ACK(00.2min)
RX FRQ: 2187.5kHz
[ACK][NCK][INF][HLD][END]
¾ When sending a reply as “unable to comply”,
select NCK to send the acknowledge with no
position data.
4-43
Operation
4.5.3
Safety or urgency area calls
For radiotelephone or FEC broadcasting, a DSC safety area call can be made as follows.
■ Procedure ■
11.. On the menu 1.DSC non-distress call, set the
Call type to SAF/Area/TEL or URG/Area/TEL
(instead of TEL, FEC also available).
The menu becomes as shown at right and
the cursor moves to the Area form.
1)DSC non-distress call
Call type :[SAF/Area/TEL
Area form :[Center&rad]
- Center
:[89ﾟN179ﾟE]
- Radius
:[0500NM]
Calling FRQ:[ 2187.5kHz]
Working FRQ:[ 2182.0kHz]
[Call]
22.. Set the area to call.
Input as below according to the Area form settings.
- When Center&rad
・ Enter the center point of the area in Center.
[Preview]
[Cancel]
1)DSC non-distress call
Call type :[SAF/Area/TEL
Area form :[Corner&dev]
- Corner
:[ ﾟN
ﾟE]
- Deviation:[ ﾟ/ ﾟ]
Calling FRQ:[ 2187.5kHz]
Working FRQ:[ 2182.0kHz]
・ Enter the radius of the area in Radius.
- When Corner&dev (shown at right)
[Call]
[Preview]
[Cancel]
・ Enter the northwest corner of the area in
Corner.
・ Enter the south and north/east and west
deviation in a range from 00 to 99 in
Deviation.
33.. Select the Working FRQ/ Calling FRQ if
needed, then press ENT to start the area call.
44.. After finishing the transmission, start the
communication with the handset in TEL
mode.
Note
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
DSC
2187.5
2187.5
TxTO:Area|SAF
Waiting for CH free
Call-F:Rx 2187.5/Tx 2187.5kHz
TEL
:Rx -----.-/Tx 2182.0kHz
[RTRY][INF][HLD][END]
Incase of the urgency call, to inform receivers of the particular topic,
additional settings such as Medical TRNSP (medical transport ship) or Neutral
ship (neutral nationality) in the Subject field as shown at right are available.
However to use this function, it is needed to set the menu 7.5.4 Medical use or
7.5.5 Neutral use to ON once after powering on the equipment.
1)DSC non-distress call
Call type :[URG/Area/TEL ]
Area form :[Center&rad]
- Center
:[89ﾟN179ﾟE]
- Radius
:[0500NM]
Subject
:[No information]
Working FRQ:[ 2182.0kHz]
Calling FRQ:[ 2187.5kHz]
[Call]
4-44
[Preview]
[Cancel]
After finishing the area call where the FEC is specified, the telex mode is set
to the equipment. Then start the telex communication with the data terminal.
Operation
4.5.4
Receiving safety or urgency area calls
■ Procedure ■
The screen at right is displayed, and the
ALM lamp blinks and the alarm grows louder
gradually.
If no procedure exists, starts operating the
received message, i.e. the specified working
frequency is set automatically. Then press
CANCEL to silence alarm and listen to the
broadcasting.
Note
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL
2182.0
2182.0
RxID:123456789|Area|SAF
Ready for listening(00.2min)
RX FRQ: 2187.5kHz
TEL
:Rx 2182.0/Tx -----.-kHz
[INF][HLD][END]
When receiving the area call where the FEC is specified, the telex mode is set
to the equipment. Then receive the telex broadcasting with the data terminal.
To check the topic when receiving an urgency area call, select INF menu to
view the detail of the message.
4-45
Operation
4.5.5
Distress alerts
When in distress, distress alerts are always transmitted by pressing the dedicated DISTRESS
key. The distress alerts transmit your own MMSI, ships position, time of the position, and the
nature of distress.
CAUTION
Do not test the distress alert.
Doing so may inconvenience local shipping and rescue centers.
When sending a distress alert, follow the instructions of the ship's captain
or officer in charge.
If a false distress alert is transmitted accidentally, select the Cancel menu
and transmit the distress cancel referring the guidance displayed on the
controller. And then report the false distress alert to a nearby RCC (Rescue
Coordination Center/ in Japan, inform the nearest Japan Coast Guard.)
Information to be reported:
Ship's name, type, nationality, and ID number, the date/time, location and
reason why the false distress alert was transmitted. Also the unit model name
and manufacture number/date, if possible.
4.5.5.1
Quick distress alerts
The following describes the procedure to send a distress alert immediately without using menus.
In this case, the nature of distress in the message will be sent as "Undesignated" by default.
Further, if no information for the position and the time of position obtained within 23.5 hours, this
information will be composed automatically.
■ Procedure ■
11.. Open the DISTRESS key cover.
22.. Press and hold the DISTRESS key for 4
seconds until the countdown is completed.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL ITU- 401
RX 4357.0 kHz
TX 4065.0
kHz
Distress call starts
SIG
in
sec
NonDST:
WKR scan bands: DROBOS:
2 4 6 8 12 16MHz EdtDST:
4-46
Operation
33.. After the antenna is tuned, the distress
alert is sent.
The distress alerts are sent on all 6 distress
and safety frequencies.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
DSC Rx: 2187.5/Tx: 2187.5kHz
Distress calling
Next :--Stage :Waiting for CH free
Call-F: / / / / /
Nature:Undesignated
PosUTC: 89ﾟ59.0123'N
:179ﾟ59.6789'E @23:59
Mode :Radiotelephone
[Cancel]
SIG
WKR
44.. The equipment stays in distress mode until
acknowledgement is received or the distress
alert cancelling procedure is complete.
¾ Unless an acknowledgement is received or the
distress alert is cancelled manually, the
distress alert repeats automatically in a
variable interval every 3.5 to 4.5 minutes.
(The time until next sending is shown at Next.)
2 4 6 8 12 16MHz
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
TEL Rx: 8291.0/Tx: 8291.0kHz
Distress calling
Next :Resends 4.1min later
Stage :Waiting for ACK
Call-F:2/4/6/8/12/16
Nature:Undesignated
PosUTC: 89ﾟ59.0123'N
:179ﾟ59.6789'E @23:59
Mode :Radiotelephone
[FRQ][Pause][POS][CHNG][Cancel]
SIG
WKR 2 4 6 8 12 16MHz
¾ The distress alert can be sent manually while
waiting for acknowledgement by the
DISTRESS key operation mentioned above.
¾ While waiting for the acknowledgement, the
radiotelephone communication is available.
Additionally, when focusing the frequencies as
shown at right, the distress and safety
frequency can be changed with the jog dial.
¾ Pressing CANCEL key or ENT moves the
focused screen and makes following options
available.
FRQ ......... Moves the cursor to the frequency section
Pause ...... Makes the distress mode pause.
POS ......... Opens the position input menu
CHNG ...... Changes the distress alert type (Multi/Single mode and the frequencies)
Cancel ..... Starts the distress alert cancelling procedure, which is needed to send the DSC
acknowledgement and to broadcast in the radiotelephone mode from the “own ship”.
Furthermore, if the POS/CHNG is edited, MEM icon is displayed to indicate that there are
some data stored temporarily until resending the distress alert.
55.. When the acknowledgement is received, the
message is displayed as shown at the right.
¾ The ALM lamp starts blinking, and the receiving
alarm gradually grows louder.
¾ The radiotelephone mode is set to the
distress/safety frequency of the band on which
the acknowledgement is received and antenna
tuning is done immediately.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL
2182.0
2182.0
DST ALT
RxID:123456789|OWN D-ACK|2MHz
DIST acknowledged(00.2min)
T x : 2|4|6|8|12|16/ U n d e s i g n a t e d / T E L
89ﾟ59.0123'N179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
Press CANCEL to silence alarm.
¾ Press the CANCEL key or ENT to silence the
alarm, then call for help with the handset.
Normally, the responding station calls on the
radiotelephone. Then reply to the receipt as
follows.
Say, "MAYDAY".
Say, "This is".
Own ship's MMSI and call sign, position, nature of distress, and rescue requests
4-47
Operation
Note
If cancelling the distress alert since a false distress alert is transmitted
accidentally, perform the distress alert cancelling procedure as follows.
1.
Press the CANCEL key while
the option selectable screen
is focused.
2.
On the popup screen, select
Continue with the jog dial,
and press ENT.
Starts the distress alert cancelling
procedure and sends the DSC
acknowledgements to own ship in
every frequency where distress
alerts are transmitted.
3.
After
DSC
acknowledgements
are complete, the popup screen
is displayed as shown at right.
If the false distress alert indicates
the FEC mode, the popup screen is
displayed as shown at lower right.
In this case, the message for
cancelling distress alert is sent in
the TLX mode automatically
without operating the DTE.
4.
According to the guidance on
the screen, broadcast to cancel
the distress alert in TEL mode.
¾ When finishing the broadcast on
a frequency, press ENT to change
to the next frequency.
¾ The cancelled frequency shows ✓
mark.
5.
When the cancelling procedure is
completed on every frequency,
displays the operating screen as
shown at right and finishes the
distress mode.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
TEL Rx: 8291.0/Tx: 8291.0kHz
Distress calling
Next :Resends 3.8min later
Stage :Waiting for ACK
C a l l - F : 2 !/ !4 W/ a6 r/ n8 i/ n1 g2 !/ !1 6
Nature:Undesignated
P o s CU aT nC c: e l8 9 tﾟ h5 e9 . t0 r1 a2 n3 s' mN i t t e d
f a l s: e1 7 d9 iﾟ s5 t9 r. e6 s7 s8 9 a' lE e r@ t2 ?3 : 5 9
M o d (e T G T: :R a 2d /i 4o /t 6e /l 8e /p 1h 2o /n 1e 6 M )
[Continue] [Return]
[FRQ][Pause][POS][CHNG][Cancel]
SIG
WKR 2 4 6 8 12 16MHz
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
DSC Rx: 2187.5/Tx: 2187.5kHz
Distress cancel calling
Stage :Waiting for CH free
Call-F: / / / / /
Nature:Undesignated
PosUTC: 89ﾟ59.0123'N
:179ﾟ59.6789'E @23:59
Mode :Radiotelephone
SIG
WKR
2 4 6 8 12 16MHz
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
TEL Rx: 2182.0/Tx: 2182.0kHz
Cancelling the distress alert
Voice cancellation procedure:
All stations. (three times)
T h i sD SiCs c[aNnAcMeEl]l[iCnAgL Lc aSlIlGsN ]
a r e c[oMmMpSlIe]t[ePdO.S &NUeTxCt],.
C a nsctealr tm yt hdei svtoriecses caalnecretl o f
o n t h e[ DrAeTqEu]i[rUeTdC ]b.a n d s
Over. according to the
T a r gmeets:s a2g/e 4o/n 6t/h e8 /s c1r2e/e n1.6 M H z
*To change the band, press ENT.
[[ OOKK ]]
SIG
WKR 2 4 6 8 12 16MHz
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
TEL Rx: 4125.0/Tx: 4125.0kHz
Cancelling the distress alert
Voice cancellation procedure:
All stations. (three times)
This is [NAME][CALL SIGN]
[MMSI][POS&UTC].
Cancel my distress alert of
[DATE][UTC].
Over.
Target: 2/ 4/ 6/ 8/ 12/ 16MHz
*To change the band, press ENT.
SIG
WKR 2 4 6 8 12 16MHz
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL
2182.0
2182.0
TxTO:All|DST|ACK
Cancelled DISTRESS (00.2min)
Call-F:2/4/6/8/12/16
[RTRY][INF][FRQ][HLD][END]
4-48
Operation
4.5.5.2
Distress alerts from the menu
Attention
During communicating in telex mode, finish it to enable the menu before practicing below.
The following describes the procedure to send a distress alert with the nature of distress selected
in the menu. Also, besides manually inputting position and the time information, the subsequent
communication mode, the transmission method and frequency can be set here.
Note: Multi-frequency or single frequency can be selected as the transmission method. The
various methods are shown below.
⋅
⋅
Multi-frequency method: The distress alert message is sent continuously on each
frequency, 2187.5 kHz, 8414.5 kHz, and at least one
other distress/safety frequency.
Single frequency method: The same distress alert message is sent on one
distress/safety frequency 5 times continuously. If 2 or
more distress/safety frequencies are selected, the same
message is transmitted 5 times continuously in the same
way on the other frequency after an interval between 3.5
to 4.5 minutes (variable).
■ Procedure ■
11.. On the status display or operation display,
while pressing and holding MENU key, press
3 NR key to open “3. Editing a distress msg”.
The distress type is displayed as
Undesignated as a default value. If the
position information is input automatically by
a GPS type device, or has already input
manually, that information is also displayed.
22.. Press ENT and select the nature of distress.
The nature of distress is selectable from below.
Nature of distress
Fire
Contents
Fire, explosion
Flooding
Flooding
Collision
Collision
Grounding
Sinking
Grounding
Listing, in
capsizing
Sinking
Disabled
Disabled and adrift
Listing
danger
Undesignated distress
Abandoning
Abandoning ship
Piracy/armed
robbery
attack
Man overboard
Man overboard
3)Editing a distress msg
Nature
:[Fire
Position
:[NE]
:[ 89ﾟ59.0123'N]
:[179ﾟ59.6789'E]
UTC of pos :[23:59]
Mode(fixed) :[Radiotelephone]
Attempt type:[Multi-FRQ ]
Tx bands
:[2/4/6/8/12/16]
[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]
of
Undesignated
Piracy attack
3)Editing a distress msg
Nature
:[Undesignated ]
Position
:[NE]
:[ 89ﾟ59.0123'N]
:[179ﾟ59.6789'E]
UTC of pos :[23:59]
Mode(fixed) :[Radiotelephone]
Attempt type:[Multi-FRQ ]
Tx bands
:[2/4/6/8/12/16]
[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]
4-49
Operation
33.. Press ENT.
The cursor moves to Position. If a valid position
and time of that position are already displayed,
no entry is necessary. Skip to step 6.
44.. Press ENT and select the quadrant of the
position with the jog dial.
The quadrant changes from NE Æ NW Æ SE
Æ SW Æ CL. Select CL to delete the input
information.
55.. After pressing ENT, input the latitude,
longitude, and time using the numeric
keypad.
66.. Press ENT and select the Mode to
change the subsequent communication
mode after the DSC call.
Either of Radiotelephone or FEC is selectable
for the subsequent communicate mode.
77.. Move the cursor to Attempt type and
press ENT to change the transmission
method for the distress alert.
Multi-frequency method is set as the default.
To change to the single frequency method,
select Single-FRQ with the job dial and press
ENT.
88.. Move the cursor to Tx bands and press
ENT to change the transmission
frequency for the distress alert.
¾ At first, all the frequencies are selected
as transmission frequencies.
¾ To change the frequencies, move the
cursor by pressing ENT to the frequencies
(band) to be unselected, turn the jog dial
so they are blank and press ENT.
¾ For the Multi-frequency method, 2 and 8
are fixed and are skipped. Also in this
case, it is necessary to select more than
one other band.
¾ After completing the Tx bands settings,
the cursor returns to Nature.
4-50
3)Editing a distress msg
Nature
:[Fire
Position
:[NE]
:[ 89ﾟ59.0123'N]
:[179ﾟ59.6789'E]
UTC of pos :[23:59]
Mode(fixed) :[Radiotelephone]
Attempt type:[Multi-FRQ ]
Tx bands
:[2/4/6/8/12/16]
[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]
3)Editing a distress msg
Nature
:[Fire
Position
:[NW]
:[ 89ﾟ59.0123'N]
:[179ﾟ59.6789'E]
UTC of pos :[23:59]
Mode(fixed) :[Radiotelephone]
Attempt type:[Multi-FRQ ]
Tx bands
:[2/4/6/8/12/16]
[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]
3)Editing a distress msg
Nature
:[Fire
Position
:[NW]
:[ 89ﾟ59.0123'N]
:[179ﾟ59.6789'W]
UTC of pos :[23:59]
Mode(fixed) :[Radiotelephone]
Attempt type:[Multi-FRQ ]
Tx bands
:[2/4/6/8/12/16]
[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]
3)Editing a distress msg
Nature
:[Fire
Position
:[NW]
:[ 89ﾟ59.0123'N]
:[179ﾟ59.6789'W]
UTC of pos :[23:59]
Mode
:[Radiotelephone]
Attempt type:[Multi-FRQ ]
Tx bands
:[2/4/6/8/12/16]
[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]
3)Editing a distress msg
Nature
:[Fire
Position
:[NW]
:[ 89ﾟ59.0123'N]
:[179ﾟ59.6789'W]
UTC of pos :[23:59]
Mode(fixed) :[Radiotelephone]
Attempt type:[Single-FRQ]
Tx bands
:[2/4/6/8/12/16]
[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]
3)Editing a distress msg
Nature
:[Fire
Position
:[NW]
:[ 89ﾟ59.0123'N]
:[179ﾟ59.6789'W]
UTC of pos :[23:59]
Mode(fixed) :[Radiotelephone]
Attempt type:[Single-FRQ]
Tx bands
:[2/ /6/8/12/16]
[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]
Operation
Note
If pressing DISTRESS key during the Tx bands settings (before fixing by pressing
ENT), the distress alerts are sent on the band(s) registered previously.
99.. Open the DISTRESS key cover.
1100.. Press and hold the DISTRESS key for 4
seconds until the countdown is
completed.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
DSC Rx: 2177.0/Tx: 2177.0kHz
3)Editing a distress msg
Nature
:[Undesignated ]
P o sDiitsitorne s s c:a[lNlE ]s t a r t s
[ 89ﾟ59.0123'N]
[179ﾟ59.6789'E]
U T C o f pions : [ 2 3 :s5e9c]
Mode
:[Radiotelephone]
Attempt type:[Multi-FRQ ]
Tx bands
:[2/4/6/8/12/16]
[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]
Note
The rest of the procedure is the same as described in the "Quick distress
alerts".
Select Preview and press ENT before calling to display the details of the
message as shown below.
3)Editing a distress msg
Format
:Distress
Self-ID
:431001234
Nature
:Fire
Position
: 89ﾟ59.0123'N
:179ﾟ59.6789'E
UTC of pos :23:59
Comm type
:Radiotelephone
EOS
:EOS
[Return]
[Tips] [Cancel]
Select Tips and press ENT to display precautions about operations in this
screen in a popup screen as shown below.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL Rx: 4015.0/Tx: 4015.0kHz
3)Editing a distress msg
N a-t uPrree s s D I S:T[RFEiSrSe k e y t o
P o s isteinodn t h e :e[dNiWt]e d m s g .
- T o s a v e D I[S T8 9mﾟs5g9:.S0a1v2e3 ' N ]
- T o u s e s a v[e1d7 9mﾟs5g9:.S6e7t8 9 ' W ]
U TNCB )oDfE FpAoUsL T :N[O2T3 :C5H9A]N G E D .
M o d[eS(afviex]e d[)S e:t[]R a d[iColtoeslee]p h o n e ]
Attempt type:[Single-FRQ]
Tx bands
:[2/ /6/8/12/16]
[Preview] [Tips] [Cancel]
This popup screen shows the following messages and the handling menus;
・
・
・
・
When sending the edited message, use DISTRESS key on the menu screen.
To save the edited message (except Pos/UTC), select Save and press ENT.
To load the saved message (except Pos/UTC), select Set and press ENT.
The default values of “3. Editing a distress msg” are not changed.
4-51
Operation
4.5.5.3
Receiving distress alerts
When a distress alert is received from another ship, displays the event immediately with the
specific two-tone alarm sound.
WARNING
If a distress alert is received, make sure to inform the ship's captain or
officer in charge. Doing so may save the lives of the crews and passengers
on the ship in distress.
■ Procedure ■
11.. When a distress alert is received, the
distress message is displayed.
¾ The ALM lamp starts blinking, and the receiving
alarm gradually grows louder. However, the
aural alarm keeps silence if the distress
position is not within 500nm, and is not in the
polar areas (greater than 70°N/S).
¾ If no procedure exists, starts operating the
received message automatically.
22.. Press the CANCEL key or ENT to stop the
alarm. Then the screen at right is displayed.
¾ Keep watch for at least 5 minutes. Notify
the coast station as appropriate.
¾ If received the same distress alert on another
frequency again, the right lower screen is
displayed. Then pressing ENT on Accept or
leaving 10 seconds changes the frequency to
8291.0 kHz for the radiotelephone mode or
8376.5 kHz for the telex mode.
¾ Press FUNC key or ENT* to move the focused
screen to the operation control screen and select
the following options to handle the procedure.
* If the A mark is not displayed, press ENT to
activate this procedure.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL
2182.0
2182.0
DST ALT
RxID:123456789|DISTRESS ALT
Waiting to send ACK(00.2min)
Single-FRQ: 2187.5kHz
TEL
:Rx 2182.0/Tx 2182.0KHz
Press CANCEL to silence alarm.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL
2182.0
2182.0
DST ALT
RxID:123456789|DISTRESS ALT
Waiting to send ACK(00.3min)
Single-FRQ: 2187.5kHz
TEL
:Rx 2182.0/Tx 2182.0kHz
[ACK][RLY][INF][FRQ][HLD][END]
ACK ....... Sends the acknowledgement to the distress alert.
RLY ....... Sends the distress relay.
INF ........ Indicates the received distress message.
FRQ....... Changes the watchkeeping frequency.
HLD ....... Makes the procedure on hold.
END....... Terminates the procedure.
Note
4-52
The distress acknowledgement is normally sent from a coast station. However
after consulting with the RCC or a coast station and being directed, it is
possible to acknowledge the ship in distress from your own ship.
If the distress alert is not received at 2187.5 kHz, the acknowledgement is
inhibited and cannot be sent.
Incase of the radiotelephone specified, after sending the acknowledgement the
frequency is set to 2182.0 kHz. Then start the radiotelephone communication
Operation
with the ship in distress according to the following procedure.
z Say "MAYDAY".
z Repeat the identity (MMSI) of the ship in distress 3 times
z Say "This is..."
z Repeat the identity (MMSI) of your ship 3 times
z Say "RECEIVED MAYDAY".
4.5.6
Incase of the FEC specified, after sending the acknowledgement the frequency
is set to 2174.5 kHz. Then start the telex communication with the data terminal.
The distress relay calls may be received without receiving the distress alert. In
this case, keep watch the distress frequency and handle the message using
the displayed options as appropriate.
Distress relay calls on behalf of someone else (DROBOSE)
If another ship is in distress but is itself unable to make a distress alert, and the master of the
ship considers that further help is necessary, the distress relay call on behalf of the ship can be
transmitted using the "DSC drobose call" menu. In this case, compose a distress relay call format
by inputting the MMSI (if known), the ship's position and the time of position (if known), and the
nature of distress to send to a specific area or a coast station.
CAUTION
When sending a drobose call, do NOT press the DISTRESS key. Doing so may
cause a false distress alert.
(Drobose calls can be sent via the [Call] button displayed on the screen.)
■ Procedure ■
11.. On the status display or operation display,
while pressing and holding MENU key, press
2 SCAN key to open “2. DSC drobose call”.
22.. Select Address and press ENT, input the
MMSI of the calling coast station.
2)DSC drobose call
Format
:[Individual]
Address
:[
Distress ID:[
Nature
:[Undesignated ]
Position
:[ ]
:[
ﾟ .
' ]
:[
ﾟ .
' ]
UTC of pos :[ : ]
[Call]
[Preview]
[Cancel]
2)DSC drobose call
Format
:[Individual]
Address
:[0
Distress ID:[
Nature
:[Undesignated ]
Position
:[ ]
:[
ﾟ .
' ]
:[
ﾟ .
' ]
UTC of pos :[ : ]
[Call]
[Preview]
[Cancel]
4-53
Operation
33.. Input the Distress ID (MMSI) of the ship
in distress, Nature, Position and/or UTC,
if known.
The nature of distress is selectable from below.
Nature of distress
Fire
Contents
2)DSC drobose call
Format
:[Individual]
Address
:[001234567]
Distress ID:[0
Nature
:[Undesignated ]
Position
:[ ]
:[
ﾟ .
' ]
:[
ﾟ .
' ]
UTC of pos :[ : ]
[Call]
[Preview]
[Cancel]
Fire, explosion
Flooding
Flooding
Collision
Collision
Grounding
Sinking
Grounding
Listing, in
capsizing
Sinking
Disabled
Disabled and adrift
Listing
danger
of
Undesignated
Undesignated distress
Abandoning
Abandoning ship
Piracy/armed
robbery
attack
Man overboard
Piracy attack
Man overboard
44.. If required, change the communication
mode and/or the calling frequency to
send the drobose call.
Mode:
Calling FRQ:
Radiotelephone or FEC
Distress and safety frequency
(2/4/6/8/12/16 MHz)
55.. Select Call and press ENT to make a
drobose call.
After sending the drobose call, TEL mode is
set while waiting for the acknowledgement as
shown at right. In this case, the watchkeeping
receiver stops scanning frequencies to watch
only the calling frequency as shown at right.
2)DSC drobose call
Distress ID:[123456789]
Nature
:[Fire
Position
:[NE]
:[ 89ﾟ59.0000'N]
:[179ﾟ59.0000'E]
UTC of pos :[23:59]
Mode
:[Radiotelephone]
Calling FRQ:[ 2187.5kHz]
[Call]
[Preview]
[Cancel]
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL
2182.0
2182.0
DST RLY
TxTO:001234567|IND|DST RLY
Waiting for ACK(00.5min)
Call-F:Rx 2187.5/Tx 2187.5kHz
TEL
:Rx 2182.0/Tx 2182.0kHz
[RLY][INF][FRQ][HLD][END]
66.. When receiving the acknowledgement
from the coast station, the screen shows
as shown at right.
¾ The ALM lamp starts blinking, and the
receiving alarm gradually grows louder.
¾ Press the CANCEL key or ENT to silence
the alarm, then start the distress traffic.
Note
4-54
Such messages can be sent using Area format. In this case, select Area (centre
or corner) for the broadcast communication.
Operation
4.6 DSC call log
DSC messages are classified as received distress messages, received other messages and
transmitted messages. The 20 most recent messages for every type are saved in the log.
CAUTION
Received distress message logs are automatically deleted after 48 hours to
avoid accidental resending or other misoperation. Accordingly, if such
messages cannot be read, it is not a malfunction.
The received distress message logs are cleared when turning off the power
by such as the breaker on the power supply. Due to the SOLAS Convention
(keeping watch on distress and safety frequencies at all times), do not turn
off the equipment when at sea.
4.6.1
Received distress messages
The distress alerts, the distress acknowledgements, the distress relay calls, and the distress
relay acknowledgements are stored in this log. For the distress alerts, the messages with the
same content are received at a maximum of 6 messages for the multi-frequency method or a
maximum of 5 messages for the single frequency method, but only one is stored unless otherwise
closed the received message during that multiple receptions.
■ Procedure ■
11.. Press the
MENU key, and through
hierarchical menus, select “4.1 Received
distress”.
¾ On the bottom line, the MMSI of the ship
is displayed highlighted by the cursor.
¾ If the message includes a reception error
(ECC error) ERR is shown in the CAT
field.
22.. Select a displayed message and press
ENT.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL Rx: 4125.0/Tx: 4125.0kHz
4.1)Received distress
No Date/Time
CAT Format
0 1 2 0 0 8 - 0 78 - 30 1 12 13 : 23 01 D S T AI LN LD I V
02 2008-07-31 10:33 DST INDIV
03 2008-07-31 10:25 DST AREA
04 2008-07-31 10:03 --- DSTRS
05 2008-07-19 22:53 ERR DSTRS
From: 431000123
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL Rx: 2065.0/Tx: 2065.0kHz
Received distress message
Type
:Distress
From
:003456789
Nature
:Man overboard
Position :12ﾟ34.0000'N
123ﾟ45.0000'E
UTC of pos:11:20
Mode
:Radiotelephone
EOS
:EOS
[Close]
4-55
Operation
4.6.2
Received other messages
Received messages other than the distress (routine, safety, and urgency) are stored in this log.
■ Procedure ■
11.. Press the
MENU key, and through
hierarchical menus, select “4.2 Received
others”.
¾ On the bottom line, the MMSI of the ship
is displayed highlighted by the cursor.
¾ If the message includes a reception error
(ECC error) ERR is shown in the CAT
field.
22.. Select a displayed message and press
ENT.
The selected message is displayed.
4.6.3
Transmitted messages
Every transmitted message is stored in this log.
■ Procedure ■
11..
Press the MENU key, and through
hierarchical menus, select “4.3 Transmitted
calls”.
On the bottom line, the MMSI of the ship is
displayed highlighted by the cursor.
22.. Select a displayed message and press ENT.
The selected message is displayed.
4-56
Operation
4.7 Display of telex communication logs
The telex communication is saved automatically as the log, and the reference is available later.
■ Procedure ■
11.. If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP
mode…" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard.
The operation of the data
terminal becomes possible in
the telex mode, except when
the controller is used.
22.. On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select Service Î Call logging history with
Enter key.
The list of the log as shown at
right is displayed.
33.. Move the cursor to the objective file referring to the timestamp and press Enter key to
view it.
¾ The file content on the viewer scrolls by the ↑ ↓ key.
¾ To close the file viewer, press the ESC key.
Note
The maximum size of a log file is 8192 bytes. When exceeding it, the excess data
are stored in another file.
4-57
Operation
4.8 USB memory operation
This section describes how to use the USB memory.
Attention
・ The following conditions are required for the USB memory.
Note) Not all USB memories satisfying the every condition are guaranteed.
The specification is complied with USB 1.1 or USB 2.0 standards.
No USB hub is built-in and is used to connect the USB memory.
No security function such as encryption or password to access is included.
No write-protect function is included, or that function is set to “Writable”.
Already formatted with FAT16 or FAT32 by Windows® OS.
・ Only the USB memory is connectable to the USB memory connector.
・ When the USB memory size is large, the file access time will be longer than small one.
・ The files or folders named with multibyte character prepared by other than the data terminal
cannot be accessed.
・ If the USB memory is removed, always close the connector with the rubber cap to ensure the
water-proof and dust-proof performance.
・ Initializing the USB memory will erase all data on the USB memory.
・ To avoid abnormal conditions, do not use the USB memory that has the broken file system.
■ Procedure ■
11.. If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP
mode…" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard.
The operation of the data
terminal becomes possible in
the telex mode, except when
the controller is used.
[TEL] Tx= 2174.5kHz/Rx= 2174.5kHz
File
Tune
Connect
USB
Service
System
Help
STATUS INFO
Scanning info
[No scanning]
Tuner/Tx.POWER
TUNER
:[READY]
Tx.POWER :[HIGH]
Last status message
Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP mode...
22.. After checking the USB mark indicating on the top of the display of the data terminal,
select File from the main menu and the objective dropdown menu.
¾ To start either one of Edit existing file, Rename file, Delete file, or Copy file, input “A:” as
the USB drive.
¾ To initialize the USB memory, select Initialize USB and operate in accordance with the
message on the dialog box.
¾ To unmount the USB memory, select Remove USB and operate in accordance with the
message on the dialog box. After completing the unmount and the USB mark of the top of
the display is erased, the USB memory can be safely removed from the data terminal.
4-58
Operation
4.9 Popup screens
The contents of the popup screens of the data terminal are as follows (in alphabetical order).
Message
Buttons
Description
Yes/ No
Is it OK to delete a file?
Yes:
Deletes the file.
No:
Cancels this operation.
Yes/ No
Is it OK to initialize the all items
where the cursor can be located.
Yes:
Initializes them.
No:
Cancels this operation.
Attention
Do you really want to change column width?
Yes/ No
Is it OK to change the column width
of a line?
Yes:
Changes the column width.
No:
Cancels this operation.
Attention
Formatting will erase all data on the USB
memory. To format the USB memory, choose
Yes.
Yes/ No
All the data of USB memory is
deleted by the format operation.
Yes:
Formats the USB memory.
No:
Cancel the format.
-----
The controller is in operation such as
menu and the data terminal cannot
be operated now.
-----
Now tuning the antenna with the
controller, and unavailable for a
while.
Attention
Are you sure to erase?
Attention
Are you sure to initialize
accessible setup data?
all
of
these
Attention
Keyboard input unavailable now.
The connected controller is in operation.
Attention
The antenna tuning is started
controller. Wait a moment, please.
by
the
Yes/ No
Is it OK to overwrite the current
database file to save the new one?
Yes:
Overwrites the current file.
No:
Cancels this operation.
OK
The print request from the controller
or by the data terminal operation has
been refused for the printing buffer
overflow.
Yes/ No
When saving a file, detected the file
size is exceeding the 8kB. The data
terminal can delete the excess data
and continue to save the file.
Yes:
Continues the process.
No:
Cancels this operation.
OK
The editing message file size is now
beyond 8kB. Please downsize it.
Yes/ No
The same file name exists. Is it 0K to
overwrite it?
Yes:
Overwrites the current file.
No:
Cancels this operation.
OK
No block is selected and refused the
request. Select a block in advance.
Confirmation
Is the frequency free now?
Yes/ No
Check the frequency is busy or not.
Yes:
Continues the process.
No:
Returns to the menu
Continue Search?
Yes/ No
Continue searching the string
specified?
Yes:
Continues searching.
No:
Cancels this operation.
Attention
The current database will be lost.
Are you sure to continue?
Attention
The DTE cancels the print request for the
DTE printing buffer overflow.
Attention
The file size exceeds the maximum value,
so the DTE deletes excess data. Are you
sure?
Attention
The maximum field size is reached.
Attention
The same file name already exists.
Do you overwrite it?
Block has not marked.
This function is impossible now.
4-59
Operation
Message
Buttons
Description
Error
File access failed.
OK
The specified file cannot be used for
any malfunction.
Error
Invalid file.
OK
The file is malformed and invalid.
Error
Keyboard I/F ROM checksum error.
OK
Detected the keyboard I/F ROM
checksum error.
Error
No folder exists.
OK
A specified folder is not found.
Error
No response.
OK
The controller may be busy and
returns no reply to the data terminal.
Error
Overcurrent has been detected at the USB
port.
OK
The attached USB device may be
failure.
Error
Register the 9-digit Self-ID in advance.
OK
Own station ID (9digit selcal number)
is needed to call the station by the 9
digit selcal number.
Error
Register this station's ID in advance.
OK
Own station ID is needed to call the
station in the telex mode.
Yes/ No
The antenna is not tuned. Starts the
antenna tuning immediately?
Yes:
Tunes immediately.
No:
Tuning is not needed.
Error
The antenna is not tuned correctly.
Tune to the frequency now?
Error
The attached USB device is not supported.
The DTE supports the USB memory only.
OK
The data terminal detects the USB
device except the USB memory.
Error
The DTE failed to access to the file system.
OK
The file system and the files are
inaccessible now.
Error
The DTE failed to print.
OK
Printing is unavailable now.
Error
The DTE failed to stop the USB drive.
OK
The USB drive cannot be unmounted.
Error
The DTE was unable to complete the
format. Please remove the USB memory.
OK
The data terminal failed to format the
USB memory, so remove the USB
memory.
Error
The file is too large.
OK
The specified file cannot be opened
because of the file size beyond the
8kB.
4-60
Operation
Message
Buttons
Description
Error
The file name extension is allowed only
“DB”.
OK
Input “DB” as the correct extension.
Error
The file name extension is allowed only
“TLX”.
OK
Input “TLX” as the correct extension.
Error
The file name is wrong.
OK
The specified file is not found, or
the file name to be copied is wrong.
Error
The file saving failed.
There is not enough room on the DTE drive.
OK
No file can be saved because the
data terminal has no sufficient
vacant memory.
Error
The keyboard is disconnected.
-----
The keyboard is disconnected and no
control for the data terminal is
available now.
Error
The keyboard is not ready.
-----
Malfunction is detected at the
keyboard I/F and the keyboard is no
longer available now.
Error
The memory is already full.
So you cannot make a new file.
OK
The number of files exceeded
maximum value (100), so a new file
cannot be made.
Error
The printer is not ready.
Check the paper and online status.
OK
The printer cannot be used. Confirm
that paper is put on or that it is
online.
Error
The same file name already exists.
OK
This file name already exists, and is
no longer available now.
Error
The station ID is not present.
OK
SELCAL number (ID) is not
registered in the specified radio
station.
Error
There is a possibility of the USB IC failure.
All USB functions are disabled.
OK
Detected the USB IC failure. And now
out of work here.
Error
There is not enough room on the DTE main
drive. Delete some files, or change the
folder.
OK
The data terminal has no sufficient
vacant memory. Delete files or
change the folder adequately.
Error
There is not enough room on the USB drive.
Delete some files, or change the folder.
OK
The USB memory has no sufficient
vacant area. Delete files or change
the folder adequately.
Error
Two or more channels are needed.
OK
Register two or more channels to
start scanning of the specified
station..
Error
Tx/Rx frequency is not present.
OK
The frequency is not registered in the
specified radio station.
4-61
Operation
Message
Buttons
Description
Formatting the USB memory.
Please wait.
-----
USB memory is being formatted.
Wait for a while.
Now printing.
Please wait.
-----
It is printing.
Wait for a while.
Now reading data.
Please wait.
-----
Information on the file and the folder
is being read. Wait for a while.
Now processing NBDP settings.
Please wait.
-----
The NBDP setting information is now
being read or saved. Wait for a while.
Now saving data.
Please wait.
-----
It is saving a file. Wait for a while.
Really quit without saving?
Yes/ No
Is it OK to quit without saving?
Yes:
Quits immediately
No:
Returns to the editor.
Replace the string?
Yes/ No
Continue to replace the strings
specified?
Yes:
Replacing.
No:
Cancels this operation.
String not found.
OK
The data terminal cannot find the
string searching.
The USB drive is installed and ready to use.
OK
Recognized the USB memory.
The USB memory can
removed from the DTE.
OK
Unmounting the USB drive was
completed.
The USB memory format complete.
OK
The format of USB memory was
completed.
There are no data to be restored.
OK
There are no data to be restored and
Undo is invalid.
now
be
safely
To stop the USB drive, choose Yes. After
the USB drive is stopped, the USB drive
can be safely removed.
Waiting for the tuner answer…
Warning
The USB memory was removed
unmounting that drive.
4-62
without
Yes/ No
Select Yes when you unmount the
USB drive. After unmounting, USB
memory can be removed.
-----
Now waiting for the answer from the
antenna tuner. Just a moment,
please.
OK
Removing the USB memory without
unmounting may cause the
malfunction of the USB memory.
Settings & Registrations
5. SETTINGS & REGISTRATIONS
This chapter describes the procedures for settings and registrations such as manual date
and time settings, registration of channels in each mode, advanced DSC settings, printer
settings, and other settings for the equipment.
5.1 Date and time settings
Normally, the date and time are updated automatically if importing GPS information. But, if
necessary, input these parameters manually as follows.
CAUTION
The time in the 7.1 Date & time menu means the present time, and is
different from the time in the 7.2 POS/TIME menu that means the time
when the position information is valid.
■ Procedure ■
11.. Press the
MENU key, and through
hierarchical menus, select 7.1 Date &
time.
7.1)Date & time
1.Date
2.Present time
3.Display form
- UTC/LT
- LT diff
:2011-12-30
:23:59
:UTC
0.Back
22.. To input the date, press ENT.
Input the year, month, and date with the
numeric keypad or jog dial, and press ENT.
7.1)Date & time
1.Date
2.Present time
3.Display form
- UTC/LT
- LT diff
:2012-12-30
:23:59
:UTC
0.Back
33.. After completing the above steps, the
cursor moves to 2. Present time.
7.1)Date & time
1.Date
2.Present time
3.Display form
- UTC/LT
- LT diff
:2012-12-31
:23:59
:UTC
0.Back
5-1
Settings & Registrations
44.. To input the present time, press ENT.
¾ Input the hours and minutes with the
numeric keypad or jog dial, and press ENT.
¾ To close this menu after completing the
date and time settings, place the cursor
on any one of the selectable items and
press the CANCEL key.
Note
5-2
7.1)Date & time
1.Date
2.Present time
3.Display form
- UTC/LT
- LT diff
:2012-12-31
:23:59
:UTC
0.Back
In addition to the above, the following items can be set in this menu.
UTC/LT:
Select a type of time, Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) or Local
Time (LT), shown on the screen.
LT diff:
Set the local time difference to display the local time.
Settings & Registrations
5.2 Own ship position and time settings
Normally, the ship's position and the time are updated automatically if importing GPS information.
But, if necessary, input these parameters manually as follows.
CAUTION
The time in the 7.2 POS/TIME menu means the time when the position
information is valid, and is different from the present time mentioned in the
7.1 Date & time menu.
■ Procedure ■
11.. Press the
MENU key, and through
hierarchical menus, select 7.2
POS/TIME.
7.2)POS/TIME
1.Own position:NE
89ﾟ59.1234'N
179ﾟ59.1234'E
2.UTC of position:
23:59
0.Back
22.. To input your own ship's position, press
ENT.
Select the position quadrant with the jog dial,
and press ENT. Then input the latitude and
longitude with the numeric keypad or jog dial,
and press ENT.
33.. When completing the input of the ship’s
position, the cursor moves to the time
column of the
2. UTC of position.
¾ Input the hours and minutes with the
numeric keypad or jog dial, and press ENT.
7.2)POS/TIME
1.Own position:NE
89ﾟ59.1234'N
179ﾟ59.1234'E
2.UTC of position:
23:59
0.Back
7.2)POS/TIME
1.Own position:NE
89ﾟ59.1234'N
179ﾟ59.1234'E
2.UTC of position:
23:59
0.Back
¾ Just after inputting the position, the
present time is input to this column
automatically.
¾ To close this menu after completing the
setting, press the CANCEL key.
Note
After the position and the time information are input manually, that information
is not overwritten with an external device, such as a GPS, automatically.
If using the GPS information after manually inputting data, set the quadrant
field mentioned above to “GPS”.
If the position and the time information are not received, from a GPS or other
device within 10 minutes after powering on, or after 10 minutes has elapsed
since the external input was interrupted, the alarm screen may appear. Further,
regardless of either manual or automatic input, if the position and the time are
not updated within 4 hours since the last entry, the alarm screen also appears.
5-3
Settings & Registrations
5.3 Controller settings
The following describes the procedure regarding individual settings for the controller such as LCD
adjustment.
5.3.1
LCD adjustment
The LCD conditions for viewability are adjustable as follows.
■ Procedure ■
11.. Press the
MENU key, and through
hierarchical menus, select 7.3.1 LCD
adjustment.
7.3.1)LCD adjustment
1.Contrast
2.Dimmer
Maximum
Typical
Minimum
3.Screen saver :
Timer(sec):
0.Back
The screen as shown at right is displayed.
06
10
08
06
OFF
060
22.. Move the cursor to the desired item and
press ENT. Then alter the settings as
appropriate with the numeric keypad or
jog dial, and press ENT again.
¾ Set each item within the ranges given
below:
‚ Contrast:
1 - 11
‚ Dimmer:
1 - 10
‚ Screen saver:
ON/OFF
Timer:
1 - 999 seconds
7.3.1)LCD adjustment
1.Contrast
: 06
2.Dimmer
Maximum
: 10
Typical
: 08
Minimum
: 06
3.Screen saver : OFF
Timer(sec): 060
0.Back
¾ To close this menu, place the cursor on
any one of the selectable items and press
the CANCEL key.
5.3.2
Sound settings
Sound settings such as the click beep are adjustable as follows.
■ Procedure ■
11.. Press the
MENU key, and through
hierarchical menus, select 7.3.2 Sound.
The screen as shown at right is displayed.
7.3.2)Sound
1.Operation
- Speaker
: ON
- Click
: ON
2.Notification level: 7
3.Sidetone
: ON
0.Back
22.. Move the cursor to the desired item and
press ENT. Then set the conditions as
appropriate with the numeric keypad or
jog dial, and press ENT again.
¾ Notification level for a tone can be set
within 1 - 7.
¾ When Sidetone is set to ON, an 800 Hz
tone sounds during keying in.
¾ To close this menu, place the cursor on
any one of the selectable items and press
the CANCEL key.
5-4
7.3.2)Sound
1.Operation
- Speaker
: ON
- Click
: ON
2.Notification level: 7
3.Sidetone
: ON
0.Back
Settings & Registrations
5.3.3
User key assignments
User key assignment enables the desired menu to be displayed immediately without moving
through the hierarchical menus, and is assignable as follows.
■ Procedure ■
11.. Press the
MENU key, and through
7.3.3)User key assign
hierarchical menus, select 7.3.3 User
key assign.
1.DSC non-distress call
2.DSC drobose call
3.Editing a distress msg
4.DSC logs
5.Radio operation
6.User channel list
7.ITU channel list
8.Receiver
The screen at right is displayed. If the
desired menu has already been registered,
the cursor is placed on that menu.
22.. Move the cursor to the desired menu to
be registered with the jog dial.
The assignable menus are as follows:
1.
DSC non-distress call
(Menu1)
18.
POS/TIME
2.
DSC drobose call
(Menu2)
19.
My controller
(Menu7.3)
3.
Editing a distress msg
(Menu3)
20.
LCD adjustment
(Menu7.3.1)
4.
DSC logs
(Menu4)
21.
Sound
(Menu7.3.2)
5.
Radio operation
(Menu5)
22.
User channels
(Menu7.4)
6.
User channel list
(Menu5.1)
23.
DSC/WKR condition
(Menu7.5)
7.
ITU channel list
(Menu5.2)
24.
Automatic ACK
(Menu7.5.1)
8.
Receiver
(Menu5.4)
25.
WKR scanning FRQ
(Menu7.5.2)
9.
Scan
(Menu5.4.7)
26.
Option
(Menu7.6)
10.
Transmitter
(Menu5.5)
27.
CH dial lock ON/OFF
---
11.
Maintenance
(Menu6)
28.
2182kHz
---
12.
Self diagnosis
(Menu6.1)
29.
AM mode
13.
DSC loop
(Menu6.1.1)
30.
DSC alarm setting
(Menu7.3.3)
14.
Alarm information
(Menu6.2)
31.
Group ID
(Menu7.5.6)
15.
Software version
(Menu6.3)
32.
Inactivity timeout
(Menu7.5.7)
16.
Setup
(Menu7)
33.
DSC call list
(Menu7.5.8)
17.
Date & time
(Menu7.1)
33.. Press ENT to complete registration.
After registration, the screen returns to the
previous hierarchical menu as shown at
right.
Note
(Menu7.2)
---
7.3)My controller
1.LCD adjustment
2.Sound
3.User key assign
4.Tx meter
5.Data transfer
6.Menu shutdown
7.CH search ref
0.Back
:PWR
:10min
:40
When the USER key is pressed in the factory default setting, 7.3 My controller
menu is immediately displayed.
5-5
Settings & Registrations
5.3.4
Selecting Tx meters
The meter displayed in the status display indicates the strength of the received signal (S meter).
However, it can also indicate one of Tx power, antenna current, PA voltage, PA current or key
information during transmission.
■ Procedure ■
11.. Press the
MENU key, and through
hierarchical menus, select 7.3 My
controller.
The screen as shown at right is displayed.
22.. Move the cursor to 4. Tx meter with the
numeric keypad or jog dial.
33.. Press ENT, and select the meter type
with the jog dial.
The selectable meters are as follows:
‚
‚
‚
‚
‚
PWR .... Tx power
Ia ........ Antenna current
Vc ....... PA voltage
Ic ........ PA current
Key…….Key information*
* When keying during the ARQ
communication, the Key is indicated
regardless of this setting.
44.. Press ENT to confirm the selection.
The setting is complete.
5-6
7.3)My controller
1.LCD adjustment
2.Sound
3.User key assign
4.Tx meter
:PWR
5.Data transfer
6.Menu shutdown
:10min
7.CH search ref
:40
0.Back
7.3)My controller
1.LCD adjustment
2.Sound
3.User key assign
4.Tx meter
:PWR
5.Data transfer
6.Menu shutdown
:10min
7.CH search ref
:40
0.Back
7.3)My controller
1.LCD adjustment
2.Sound
3.User key assign
4.Tx meter
:Ia
5.Data transfer
6.Menu shutdown
:10min
7.CH search ref
:40
0.Back
7.3)My controller
1.LCD adjustment
2.Sound
3.User key assign
4.Tx meter
:Ia
5.Data transfer
6.Menu shutdown
:10min
7.CH search ref
:40
0.Back
Settings & Registrations
5.3.5
Transferring user channel data to another controller
When 2 controllers are connected, stored information (user channel table) can be transferred
from the controller having access rights to another controller (monitor condition).
■ Procedure ■
11.. Press the
MENU key, and through
hierarchical menus, select 7.3 My
controller.
22.. Move the cursor to 5. Data transfer with
the numeric keypad or jog dial and press
ENT.
The popup screen as shown at right is
displayed.
33.. Press ENT to confirm the selection.
¾
¾
The popup screen as shown at right is
displayed to indicate the controller's
status for forwarding.
The screen at right (below) is displayed
on the monitor.
If OK is selected or the screen is left as
it is for 10 seconds, transferring of
stored information is started.
7.3)My controller
1.LCD adjustment
2.Sound
3.User key assign
4.Tx meter
:PWR
5.Data transfer
6.Menu shutdown
:10min
7.CH search ref
:40
0.Back
7.3)My controller
1.LCD
OK adjustment
to transfer the
2.Sound
user channels to
3.User key assign
another controller?
4.Tx meter
: Ia
[ OKtransfer
[Cancel]
5.Data
6.Menu shutdown
:10min
7.CH search ref
:40
0.Back
7.3)My controller
1.LCD adjustment
2.Sound
Wait a moment, please.
3.User key assign
4.Tx meter
: Ia
5.Data transfer
6.Menu shutdown
:10min
7.CH search ref
:40
0.Back
OK to update this
user channel table?
[ OK ]
[Cancel]
[Display on monitor]
44.. Forwarding of stored information is
started.
¾
¾
¾
During forwarding, the popup screen as
shown at right is displayed.
The screen at right (below) is displayed
on the monitor.
The previous screen is returned to when
forwarding is completed.
Note
To cancel forwarding midway,
press the CANCEL key or ENT.
7.3)My controller
1.LCD adjustment
2.Sound
Data sending...
3.User key assign
4.Tx meter
: Ia
[Cancel]
5.Data transfer
6.Menu shutdown
:10min
7.CH search ref
:40
0.Back
Updating the table...
[Cancel]
[Display on monitor]
5-7
Settings & Registrations
5.3.6
Setting the inactivity timer (for menu shutdown)
To close menus of the controller automatically which is left as opening menus, the inactivity timer
can be set according to the following procedure.
■ Procedure ■
11.. Press the
MENU key, and through
hierarchical menus, select 7.3 My
controller.
22.. Move the cursor to 6. Menu shutdown
with the numeric keypad or jog dial, and
press ENT.
33.. Input the timer value and press ENT.
¾
¾
5.3.7
The range is from 00 to 60 minutes.
To set this timer to OFF, input 00.
In this case, the screen shows OFF as
shown at right.
7.3)My controller
1.LCD adjustment
2.Sound
3.User key assign
4.Tx meter
:PWR
5.Data transfer
6.Menu shutdown
:10min
7.CH search ref
:40
0.Back
7.3)My controller
1.LCD adjustment
2.Sound
3.User key assign
4.Tx meter
:PWR
5.Data transfer
6.Menu shutdown
:OFF
7.CH search ref
:40
0.Back
Setting the reference value for the channel auto search
When making a DSC routine call, the controller searches the working channel (frequency)
automatically by checking the every channel busy referring the signal level with the value set as
follows.
■ Procedure ■
11.. Press the
MENU key, and through
hierarchical menus, select 7.3 My
controller.
22.. Move the cursor to 7. CH search ref with
7.3)My controller
1.LCD adjustment
2.Sound
3.User key assign
4.Tx meter
:PWR
5.Data transfer
6.Menu shutdown
:10min
7.CH search ref
:40
0.Back
the numeric keypad or jog dial, and
press ENT.
33.. Input the reference value and press ENT.
The range is from 00 to 50.
5-8
7.3)My controller
1.LCD adjustment
2.Sound
3.User key assign
4.Tx meter
:PWR
5.Data transfer
6.Menu shutdown
:OFF
7.CH search ref
:45
0.Back
Settings & Registrations
5.4 Registering user channels
Often used frequencies at the controller for the radiotelephone, CW, and DSC mode can be
registered as user channels and used in scanning radio settings or groups. A total of 20 groups
with 20 channels set to each group (i.e. 400 channels) can be registered. Furthermore, the user
channels of the telex frequency can be registered to the station list of the data terminal.
■ Procedure ■
11.. Press the
MENU key, and through
hierarchical menus, select 7.4 User
channels (index).
22.. Select the desired row or group to be edited
with the numeric keypad or jog dial.
The screen at right is displayed. (This
example is for new registration to group 03.)
Also, if an unregistered group is opened,
TEL is displayed at Type as the default.
33.. Press ENT to enter the group name.
Up to 18 characters can be registered.
The following characters are available:
‚ Alphabet (capital and small letters)
‚ Numbers 0 - 9
‚ The following signs, space and
determination symbol (◄)
[ ] _ " # % & ' ( ) ? @ + - / = : ; < >
Group names can be omitted.
¾
¾
¾
44.. Select a character and press ENT one by
one.
¾ When inputting numbers with the
numeric keypad ENT is not needed.
¾ To return to the previous letter, press the
CANCEL key.
7.4)User channels (index)
No CH group name
Type
01 JRC Tokyo
TEL
CW
02 Pacific ABC
03
04
05
06
07
08
7.4)User channels (table)
Name:
Type: TEL
CHNo
Rx[kHz]
Tx[kHz]
041
042
043
044
045
046
7.4)User channels (table)
Name: ◄
Type: TEL
CHNo
Rx[kHz]
Tx[kHz]
041
042
043
044
045
046
7.4)User channels (table)
Name: Japan Radio◄
Type: TEL
CHNo
Rx[kHz]
Tx[kHz]
041
042
043
044
045
046
Mode
Mode
Mode
¾ To complete name entry of 18 characters long,
press ENT after selecting the last character by
the jog dial. Or, if the name is less than 18
characters long, following the name, select the
determination symbol (◄), as shown at right
and press ENT.
Note
The character sequence shown by turning the jog dial is as follows:
◄AB C D E F G H I J K LM N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n
o p q r s t u v w x y z [ ] _ " # % & ' ( ) ? @ + - / = : ; < > 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 (space)
5-9
Settings & Registrations
55.. After completing the above steps, the
cursor returns to Type.
¾ If necessary, change the group attribute
(communication mode or custom).
¾ The following attributes can be
selected:
‚
‚
‚
‚
7.4)User channels (table)
Name: Japan Radio
Type: TEL
CHNo
Rx[kHz]
Tx[kHz]
041
042
043
044
045
046
Mode
TEL ··········· Radiotelephone mode
DSC ··········· Digital selective calling mode
CW ············ Continuous wave mode
Custom
Communication mode mix
66.. When setting of group attributes is
completed, the cursor returns to the
topmost row of the channel number.
(CHNo).
7.4)User channels (table)
Name: Japan Radio
Type: TEL
CHNo
Rx[kHz]
Tx[kHz]
041
042
043
044
045
046
Mode
77.. Select the channel number to register
with the jog dial, and press ENT.
Register as follows in the popup screen at right.
¾ When the group attribute is Custom, specify
the communication mode at Mode.
Otherwise, the communication mode is
fixed to the mode specified at Type.
¾ To reference a frequency from the ITU
channel, move the cursor to ITU channel,
press ENT, and specify that channel number.
7.4)User channels (table)
Name:
Japan
Radio TEL
CHNo.
041/Type
Type:
TEL
Mode
:TEL
CHNoITURx[kHz]
Channel :Tx[kHz]
041Rx freq(kHz) :
042Tx freq(kHz) :
043[OK] [Cancel] [Erase]
044
045
046
Mode
¾ Move the cursor to Rx freq(kHz), press
ENT, and enter the Rx frequency.
¾ Move the cursor to Tx freq(kHz), press
ENT, and enter the Tx frequency.
88.. After completing the above steps, move
the cursor to OK, and press ENT to
complete registration.
¾ Follow the same procedure above to
create a group of channels.
¾ Already registered channels can be
changed by the above procedure.
7.4)User channels (table)
Name: Japan Radio
Type: TEL
CHNo
Rx[kHz]
Tx[kHz]
041
4071.0
4071.0
042
043
044
045
046
Mode
TEL
¾ To close this menu, place the cursor on
any one of the registration numbers, and
press the CANCEL key.
Note
5-10
To delete an already registered channel, move the cursor to Erase in the
above popup screen, and press ENT.
To erase an already registered group, move the cursor to "000 ALL CLEAR
function" in the bottommost row of the channel list, and press ENT. Next,
move the cursor to OK in the confirmation screen, and press ENT.
To erase all already registered groups, move the cursor to "00 ALL CLEAR
function" in the User channels (index) screen, and press ENT. Next, move the
cursor to OK in the confirmation screen, and press ENT.
When the 7.6.1 Connection is set to DTE, the group 20 becomes the reserved
group for telex channels of the data terminal and inaccessible at the controller.
Settings & Registrations
5.5 Advanced settings for DSC/WKR
The following describes the procedure for the advanced DSC settings such as automatic
acknowledgement, as well as setting the watch frequency of the watch keeping receiver.
■ Menu screen ■
Press the MENU key, and through
hierarchical menus, select 7.5 DSC/WKR
condition.
The following describes the procedures from
this screen. Note that the screen at right
shows factory default settings.
5.5.1
7.5)DSC/WKR condition
1.Automatic ACK
2.WKR scanning FRQ
3.DSC alarm setting
4.Medical use
5.Neutral use
6.Group ID
7.Inactivity timeout
8.DSC call list
:OFF
:OFF
Automatic acknowledgement
While the automatic acknowledgement is set to ON, and no menu is displayed and there is no
active procedure, if either one of the individual calls below is received, the acknowledgement is
sent automatically.
‚ Safety test call
‚ Safety position request call
‚ Routine polling call
‚ Individual call requesting communication without valid frequency (*)
(*) In this case, the “unable to comply” acknowledgement is sent.
■ Procedure ■
11.. Move the cursor to 1. Automatic ACK,
and press ENT.
The screen as shown at right is displayed.
7.5.1)Automatic ACK
1.Test call
2.Position RQ call
3.Polling call
4.Individual call
:ON
:OFF
:ON
:ON
0.Back
22.. Set the call setting targeted for
automatic acknowledgement to ON.
5.5.2
Setting DSC watch frequency
Set the frequency to watch on the WKR (DSC watch keeping receiver).
■ Procedure ■
11.. Move the cursor to 2. WKR scanning
FRQ, and press ENT.
The screen as shown at right is displayed.
22.. Press ENT, and set another frequency in
7.5.2)WKR scanning FRQ
1.Registration
- CH1 2187.5kHz
- CH2 4207.5kHz
- CH3 6312.0kHz
- CH4 8414.5kHz
- CH5 12577.0kHz
- CH6 16804.5kHz
0.Back
:(Const)
:OFF
:ON
:(Const)
:ON
:OFF
addition to 2187.5 kHz and 8414.5 kHz to ON.
Note
In accordance with the SOLAS Convention, 2187.5 kHz and 8414.5 kHz cannot be
turned OFF.
5-11
Settings & Registrations
5.5.3
Setting receiving alarms
The DSC receiving alarm can be set as follows.
■ Procedure ■
Move the cursor to 3. DSC alarm setting, and
press ENT.
The screen as shown at right is displayed.
Change the settings as appropriate.
7.5.3)DSC alarm setting
1.Safety/Routine RX ALM :ON
2.Distress RX ALM
- Maximum distance(NM):500
- Self-terminating
:OFF
0.Back
¾ To disable the receiving alarms for routine
and safety calls, set 1. Safety/Routine RX
ALM to OFF.
¾ The receiving alarms condition of distress alerts or distress relay calls can be changed
using the menu 2. Distress RX ALM as follows.
- Normally when receiving a new distress event, the receiving alarm has to be stopped
manually. However if the ship in distress is located within 70 degree north and 70
degree south latitude, and farther than the Maximum distance value while the Selfterminating set is ON, the alarm is treated as the self-terminating alarm.
- The Maximum distance can be set within the range of 500 to 999 NM.
Note1)
If making this value valid, always set the Self-terminating to ON.
Note2)
If receiving DSC messages from the ships located out of range, the messages
are handled normally except the alarm sound.
5.5.4
Using medical/neutral settings for urgency calls
Set the condition so that an urgency area call containing the additional subject of either "Medical
transportation" or "Neutral nationality" can be sent. It is useful for the situation when sailing
dangerous waters such as in areas of political instability, and needed to inform receivers of the
additional information if any of the following apply.
- Own ship is performing medical transportation and protected under the 1949 Geneva Convention.
- Own ship is of neutral nationality in accordance with ITU resolution 18 (Mob-83).
Additionally note that this setting is returned to the default (OFF) if the power is turned off.
■ Procedure ■
To use these kinds of calls, set 4. Medical use or 5. Neutral use condition to ON.
5.5.5
Registering the ship's group ID
Register the group ID (group ship ID number) for receiving group calls.
■ Procedure ■
11.. Move the cursor to 6. Group ID, and
press ENT.
The screen as shown at right is displayed.
22.. Move the cursor to register the ID
number and press ENT, then input the 9
digits ID (leftmost digit fixed to 0).
¾ Upto 20 groups can be registered.
¾ When finished, press CANCEL key.
5-12
7.5.6)Group ID
No 9-digit ID number
01 043100001
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Settings & Registrations
5.5.6
Setting the inactivity timer (for procedures on hold)
When making a procedure on hold, the procedure is automatically terminated after the time set as
follows.
■ Procedure ■
11.. Move the cursor to 7. Inactivity timeout,
and press ENT.
The screen as shown at right is displayed.
Change the settings as appropriate.
1. ACKed distress alert
7.5.7)Inactivity timeout
1.ACKed distress alert:OFF
2.RCVed other distress:OFF
3.Non-distress call
:15min
4.Other communications:030sec
0.Back
The acknowledged distress alert events
sent from the own ship:
- The range is 00 (OFF) to 60 minutes.
2. RCVed other distress
The distress events of other ships
- The range is 00 (OFF) to 60 minutes.
3. Non-distress call
Routine, safety and urgency events
- The range is 00 (OFF) to 60 minutes.
4. Other communications
Communications without using DSC
- The range is 010 to 600 seconds.
5.5.7
Registering the DSC call list
To call the station using the DSC, registers the station names, MMSI and the calling frequencies
as follows.
■ Procedure ■
11.. Move the cursor to 8. DSC call list, and
press ENT.
The screen as shown at right is displayed.
7.5.8)DSC call list
No Station name
MMSI
01 JRC Mitaka1
431000001
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
22.. Move the cursor to the line to be
changed and press ENT to display the
frequency list as shown at right.
33.. Input data as appropriate using the
numeric keypad or jog dial.
7.5.8)DSC call list(FRQ)
Name:JRC Mitaka1
MMSI:431000001
No Rx[kHz] Tx[kHz] Category
01 2177.0 2189.5 RTN
02 4219.5 4208.0 RTN
03 4220.0 4208.5 RTN
04 4220.5 4209.0 RTN
05
06
¾ Upto 20 channels for every 20 stations can
be registered.
¾ When finished, press CANCEL key.
5-13
Settings & Registrations
5.6 Setting connections for options
When setting connections between the controller and optional devices, such as a printer,
configure the conditions as appropriate according to the device type, as follows.
■ Procedure ■
11.. Press the
MENU key, and through
7.6)Option
hierarchical menus, select 7.6 Option.
1.Connection
2.Data out
3.Baudrate
4.Flow control
5.Print direction
:None/CMD
:--:--:--:---
0.Back
22.. Move the cursor to the desired item, and
press ENT.
Move the cursor to the right. Then select the
condition as appropriate and press ENT.
7.6)Option
1.Connection
2.Data out
3.Baudrate
4.Flow control
5.Print direction
:None/CMD
:--:--:--:---
0.Back
Note
- The content and the selectable conditions of each item are as follows.
Item Name
Content
Selectable conditions
: Factory default)
Connection
Connection status and printer type
None/CMD/ Serial PRN/
NKG-800/ DTE
Data out
Printing method for DSC messages
---/ Auto/ Manual
Baudrate
Transmission speed to printer
---/ 4.8k/ 9.6k/ 38.4k/ 57.6kbps
Flow control
Handshake setting with printer
---/ None/ Hard
Print direction
Printing sequence of lines
---/ Upright/ Invert
- When connecting a serial printer (e.g. NKG-91), set the items as follows:
1.Connection
:Serial PRN
2.Data out
:Auto
3.Baudrate
:4.8k
4.Flow control
:Hard
5.Print direction
:Invert (NKG-91)/Upright (DPU-414)
- When connecting the NKG-800 printer, set the items as follows:
1.Connection
:NKG-800
2.Data out
:Auto
- If no option is connected, select None/CMD at the Connection.
Note) When None/CMD is set, connect nothing to the serial port.
- When connecting the data terminal to the controller for the telex communication,
set Connection item to DTE. Note that restart the system just after this setting.
Moreover, Baudrate, Flow control and Print direction become unchangeable in
this case.
5-14
Settings & Registrations
5.7 Setting of data terminal
The following describes the procedure regarding LCD adjustment, such as the color settings and
brightness, and registration of the station list.
5.7.1
LCD adjustment
■ Procedure ■
11.. If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP
mode…" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard.
The operation of the data
terminal becomes possible in
the telex mode, except when
the controller is used.
22.. On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select System Î Config with Enter key.
The setting conditions
concerning to the screen are
displayed.
Config
LCD/LED dimmer (0-15)
LCD/LED dimmer button setting
Screensaver setting
- Function ON/OFF
- Starting time (1-15)
Display color pattern
User defined color setting
- Background color of main display:
- Text color of main display
- Background color of H&F display :
- Text color of H&F display
- Shortcut character color
Set
13
ON
3 minutes
Ocean Day
Green
White
Lime
Navy
Orange
Cancel
33.. Select the item to be changed by the cursor and press Enter key, then input the
appropriate condition.
Set the item using the numeric
keypad or dropdown menu,
where the cursor moves to the
right as shown at right. As for
other items, the specific menu
is displayed.
5-15
Settings & Registrations
44.. When completing the setting, move the cursor to the Set and press Enter key.
Note
The content of each setting item is as follows.
Item
5-16
Content of setting
Remarks
Without using this menu,
the dimmer is adjustable
with Ctrl+Ç or Ctrl+È
operation.
LCD/LED dimmer (0-15)
Adjusts the brightness of the LCD
and the panel lamp by 16 steps.
LCD/LED dimmer button setting
Sets the brightness of the LCD and
the panel lamp when using the DIM
key on the panel.
Screensaver setting
- Function ON/OFF
Sets the screen saver ON/OFF.
- Starting time (1-15)
Sets the time until the screensaver
starts.
Display color pattern
Sets the color of the screen from the
following 9 patterns of the dropdown
list.
- Ocean Day/ Dusk/ Night
- Earth Day/ Dusk/ Night
- Basic Black/ White
- User defined
User defined color setting
- Background color of main display
Sets the background color of the
main screen from the following.
Black/ Gray/ Silver/ White/ Maroon/
Red/ Olive/ Yellow/ Green/ Lime/
Teal/ Cyan/ Navy/ Blue/ Purple/
Magenta/ Orange
・ This menu is valid only
when Display color
pattern = User defined.
・ Setting the same color
with the main screen
or the short cut
character is inhibited.
- Text color of main display
Sets the text color of the main
screen from the following.
Black/ Gray/ Silver/ White/ Maroon/
Red/ Olive/ Yellow/ Green/ Lime/
Teal/ Cyan/ Navy/ Blue/ Purple/
Magenta/ Orange
・ This menu is valid only
when Display color
pattern = User defined.
・ Setting the same color
with the background of
the main screen is
inhibited.
- Background color of H&F display
Sets the background color of the
header/footer screen from the
following.
Black/ Gray/ Silver/ White/ Maroon/
Red/ Olive/ Yellow/ Green/ Lime/
Teal/ Cyan/ Navy/ Blue/ Purple/
Magenta/ Orange
・ This menu is valid only
when Display color
pattern = User defined.
・ Setting the same color
with the text of the
header/footer screen is
inhibited.
- Text color of H&F display
Sets the text color of the header/
footer screen from the following.
Black/ Gray/ Silver/ White/ Maroon/
Red/ Olive/ Yellow/ Green/ Lime/
Teal/ Cyan/ Navy/ Blue/ Purple/
Magenta/ Orange
・ This menu is valid only
when Display color
pattern = User defined.
・ Setting the same color
with the background of
the header/footer
screen is inhibited.
- Shortcut character color
Sets the shortcut character color
from the following.
Black/ Gray/ Silver/ White/ Maroon/
Red/ Olive/ Yellow/ Green/ Lime/
Teal/ Cyan/ Navy/ Blue/ Purple/
Magenta/ Orange
・ This menu is valid only
when Display color
pattern = User defined.
・ Setting the same color
with the background of
the main screen is
inhibited.
The screensaver is invalid
at the following cases;
・ communicating in the
telex mode,
・ running self-diagnosis.
Settings & Registrations
5.7.2
Registering station list
■ Procedure ■
11.. If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP
mode…" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard.
The operation of the data
terminal becomes possible in
the telex mode, except when
the controller is used.
22.. On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select Service Î Station list with Enter
key.
The station list is displayed.
No. Station Name
1 Station 01
2 Station 02
3 Station 03
10
ID
004310123
004311234
431012345
Station list
Location
N33ﾟ45' E138ﾟ12'
N37ﾟ22' E135ﾟ51'
F.Sig
DOTDOT
DOTDOT
[Edit]
[Erase]
[Print]
[Cancel]
↓
33.. Select the line to be registered newly or to be changed with the cursor and press
Enter key. Then input the station information including the channels on the station list
edit screen.
¾ Input the radio station name
within 16 characters to Station
Name column.
(The @ character is unavailable.)
¾ Input 4 (coast station), 5 (ships
station) or 9 digits SELCAL
number to Station ID column.
¾ The Location and Free CH Sig
are optional.
¾ Move the cursor to the line to
be registered and press Enter
key. Then input the Tx/Rx
frequencies on the popup
screen at right.
44.. After inputting, press Enter key to close the screen and finish the registration.
5-17
Settings & Registrations
Note
5-18
There is the station database menu (Service Î Station database) as a similar
registration menu to register the station information. The station database
operation is basically the same with the station list. However note that the station
list is designed for the manual input only, but the station database is designed to
register the station information more easily such as copying the original station
database prepared in advance. The functions available on the station database
screen are as follows.
・ Program ··············
Registers the station information located
cursor to the desired line of the station list.
with
the
・ Read ···················
Reads the station database saved in the flash ROM or
the USB memory.
・ Write ···················
Saves the prepared station database in another drive or
the folder.
・ Get ·····················
Loads station information of the station list on a line of
the station database.
Settings & Registrations
5.8 Setting telex mode
The following describes the procedure to check or set the condition for the telex communication.
■ Procedure ■
11.. If displaying the message of "Press Enter key to get the access right in the NBDP
mode…" on the data terminal, press Enter key on the keyboard.
The operation of the data
terminal becomes possible in
the telex mode, except when
the controller is used.
22.. On the main menu and the dropdown menu, select System Î NBDP setup with Enter
key.
The setting conditions
concerning to the telex
communication are displayed.
33.. Select the item to be changed with the cursor, and press Enter key.
The input screen as shown at right is
displayed.
※ An example of Max. FEC error rate
Setup data input
Max. FEC error rate : [ 30] %
Input range is from 1 to 100.
Set
Cancel
44.. Press Enter key to move the cursor to the right. Then input the value and press Enter
key again.
The cursor moves to Set.
Setup data input
Max. FEC error rate : [ 30] %
Input range is from 1 to 100.
Set
Cancel
5-19
Settings & Registrations
55.. When the cursor is located on Set, press Enter key to set the value and close the
popup screen.
66.. After completing the every input, move the cursor to Set and press Enter key to save
and finish the registration.
Note
When selecting the Initialize with the cursor and pressing Enter key, the every
accessible item is reset to the factory default setting.
The content of each item and the factory default setting values are as follows.
Item
Setting contents
Initial
value
Remarks
When setting this item,
contact our company or
agency.
ARQ/FEC 4- or 5-digit Self-ID
Registers the SELCAL number.
※ 4-digit is for the coast station.
-----
GFEC 4- or 5-digit Self-ID
Registers the group ID.
※ 4-digit is for the coast station
-----
ARQ/FEC 9-digit Self-ID
9-digit SELCAL number for
reference.
-----
GFEC 9-digit Self-ID
Registers the 9-digit group ID.
-----
Answerback
Registers the answerback code
used with WRU and Hereis.
-----
Max. FEC error rate
Sets the permissible error rate that
occurs during CFEC receiving.
30 %
Max. automatic call series
Sets times to retry calling a station
if failed to call the station using the
CALL function.
Collective FEC receiving
Sets ON/OFF of the CFEC or SFEC
receiving.
ON
Time duration for AUTO
Sets the interval time until retrying
if failed to call a coast station using
the AUTOTELEX function.
10 min
Restart
Sets ON/OFF of the rephasing
function
if
disconnected
the
communication in ARQ mode.
ON
Finite start/restart
Sets ON/OFF of the limit of the
ARQ call times, which is 128 times
for phasing and 32 times for
rephasing.
ON
Transmitter pre-key time
Sets a period between key on and
starting the signal output.
10 ms
5-20
Common with the DSC
When setting this item,
contact our company or
agency.
Optional
Optional
Maintenance & Inspection
6. MAINTENANCE & INSPECTION
The performance and lifetime of the equipment depend on appropriate maintenance. This
chapter describes an outline of maintenance and inspection, self diagnosis and
troubleshooting.
6.1 General maintenance & inspection
In order to operate the equipment under optimum conditions, it is vital to perform regular
inspections and also, to keep accurate records. Inspections enable problems to be identified
before they become major malfunctions. The following inspections should be made regularly.
Inspection
sequence
Inspection item
Procedure
Antenna system
Check that antennas and the connectors are secure.
RF GAIN function
In the radiotelephone mode (TEL), turn the RF GAIN
control on the controller having access rights. Is the
radio static (noise) from the speaker adjustable?
Receiver condition
check by speaker output
Check that the voice level and noise level are not
abnormally loud or soft.
Handset PTT switch
In the radiotelephone (TEL) mode, press the PTT
switch, and check that the unit transmits immediately
on the Tx meter or by TX and ON displayed on the
screen.
Transmission and
reception check by
performing radio
communication
In the radiotelephone (TEL) mode, check that normal
conversation is possible.
Condition of the data
terminal
When the communication mode is other than the telex
mode (e.g. TEL mode), check that the communication
mode can be set to the telex mode by pressing the
Enter key on the keyboard of the data terminal.
Air filter
Check that if the air filters of the power supply and/or
the battery charger are clogged with dust.
6-1
Maintenance & Inspection
6.2 Self diagnosis inspection
The following describes the procedure for performing self diagnosis in the 6.1 Self diagnosis
menu.
■ Procedure ■
11.. Press
FUNC Î 8 T E S T .
The 6.1 Self diagnosis menu is displayed.
6.1)Self diagnosis
1.Transceiver
2.Controller/DTE
3.Transceiver log
4.Controller/DTE log
5.DSC/NBDP loop
6.Printout
:Valid
0.Back
22.. Select Transceiver, Controller/DTE, or
DSC/NBDP loop.
¾ When Transceiver is selected, the screen
at right is displayed.
¾ For DSC/NBDP loop, a shortcut menu for
diagnosing the modem is as shown in the
screen at right.
33.. In the above screen, press ENT, select
the diagnosis mode with the jog dial, and
press ENT. Self diagnosis is performed.
The following test modes are available:
6.1.1) Transceiver ........ ALL (all modes)
TRX&MODEM
PA&ATU
WKR MODEM
TRX
PA
ATU
6.1.2) Controller/DTE ... ALL (all modes)
DGT CKT
AF output
LCD&LED
Speaker
Printer
DTE
Note
6-2
6.1.1)Transceiver
Target
- ATU 1.Serial I/F
2.RBK port
3.Band1 input
4.Band1 tune
5.Band2 input
6.Band2 tune
7.Band3 input
6.1.1)Transceiver
Target
- ATU 1.Serial I/F
2.RBK port
3.Band1 input
4.Band1 tune
5.Band2 input
6.Band2 tune
7.Band3 input
6.1.1)Transceiver
Target
- ATU 1.Serial I/F
2.RBK port
3.Band1 input
4.Band1 tune
5.Band2 input
6.Band2 tune
7.Band3 input
:ALL
:TRX&MODEM
:ATU
:OK
:Checking
- If the jog dial is turned while the cursor is at Target when Transceiver is selected,
the diagnosis items of each unit and previous diagnosis results can be browsed.
- To cancel self diagnosis midway, press the CANCEL key.
- The results of the self diagnosis are stored as a log, and up to 10 logs can be
confirmed from the 6.1.3 Transceiver log or 6.1.4 Controller/DTE log menu.
- The self diagnosis results are printed out on the connected printer as the factory
default setting. However note that the print format is selectable from Valid (the
target name and the results of diagnosis items), Simple (the target name and the
result), and Invalid (Not print) using the menu 6.1.1 Printout.
- The self diagnosis test contents and results are as shown below. However note
that if PA and/or ATU is in below freezing conditions, to avoid the failure of the
moving part, the FAN is not checked and “-“(hyphen) is shown as the result.
Maintenance & Inspection
Unit Name
Test Item
ATU
PA
Transceiver
TRX
Contents
:Serial communication
:RBK interface
:2140 kHz input value
:2140 kHz tuning operation
:4149 kHz input value
:4149 kHz tuning operation
:6230 kHz input value
:6230 kHz tuning operation
:8297 kHz input value
:8297 kHz tuning operation
:16546 kHz input value
:16546 kHz tuning operation
:25118 kHz input value
:25118 kHz tuning operation
:Air cooling fan operation
:Confirmation of PA diagnosis
viability
RBK port
:RBK overcurrent detection
Memory1
:EEPROM1 operation
Memory2
:EEPROM2 operation
PA(A) voltage :PA (A) PS voltage
PA(B) voltage :PA (B) PS voltage *
DA output
:2140 kHz output from DA
PA(A) bias
:PA (A) idling current
PA(A) output :PA (A) output
PA(B) bias
:PA (B) idling current *
PA(B) output :PA (B) output *
PA(A)+(B) output :Combined PA output *
LPF band1 output :2140kHz output
LPF band2 output :3023kHz output
LPF band3 output :4149kHz output
LPF band4 output :6230kHz output
LPF band5 output :8297kHz output
LPF band6 output :12365kHz output
LPF band7 output :16546kHz output
LPF band8 output :25118kHz output
Fan1
: Air cooling fan1 operation
Fan2
: Air cooling fan2 operation *
Fan3
: Air cooling fan3 operation
Memory
Digital CKT
BK port
PLL lock
Serial I/F
RBK port
Band1 input
Band1 tune
Band2 input
Band2 tune
Band3 input
Band3 tune
Band4 input
Band4 tune
Band5 input
Band5 tune
Band6 input
Band6 tune
Fan
PA mute port
:EEPROM operation
:FPGA operation
:BK signal state
:State of PLL for DDS/DUC
clock
Band1-TX output :1600 kHz output
Band2-TX output :22000 kHz output
Band3-TX output :27500 kHz output
Band4-TX output :RX diagnosis circuit
Band1-RX BPF1 :1600 kHz Rx level
Band2-RX BPF2 :390 kHz Rx level
Band3-RX BPF3 :1590 kHz Rx level
Band4-RX BPF4 :3190 kHz Rx level
Band5-RX BPF5 :6090 kHz Rx level
Band6-RX BPF6 :10490 kHz Rx level
Band7-RX BPF7 :17990 kHz Rx level
Band8-RX BPF8 :27500 kHz Rx level
Results
OK: Normal
NG: Abnormal
OK: Normal
NG: Abnormal
* 500W model only
OK: Normal
NG: Abnormal
6-3
Maintenance & Inspection
Transceiver
(Cont’d)
Unit Name
WKR
MODEM
Memory1
Memory2
Memory3
PLL lock
Band1-RX
Band2-RX
Band3-RX
Band4-RX
Band5-RX
Band6-RX
Band7-RX
DSC/NBDP
DSC/NBDP
:FROM operation
:EEPROM operation
:SDRAM operation
:State of PLL for DDS clock
BPF1 :2187.5 kHz DSC loop
BPF2 :4207.5 kHz DSC loop
BPF3 :6312.0 kHz DSC loop
BPF4 :8414.5 kHz DSC loop
BPF5 :12577.0 kHz DSC loop
BPF6 :16804.5 kHz DSC loop
BPF7 :Wide-band filter operation
loop1 :AF modem loop
loop2 :AF modem & TRX loop
Test Item
Contents
DGT CKT
x Memory1
x Memory2
x Memory3
:FROM operation
:EEPROM operation
:SDRAM operation
AF output
AF connection to TRX
OK: Normal
NG: Abnormal
Results
OK: Normal
NG: Abnormal
OK: Normal
NG: Abnormal
Screen and ALM lamp display operation
LCD&LED
Note:
Check visually if every dot and red and
green ALM lamp alternately work normally
for 3 seconds.
DONE
Sound test
Speaker
Controller/
Data terminal
Note:
Check if the 1500 Hz tone sounds correctly.
After that, press ENT on the popup screen
to finish this process.
Print out test
Printer
DTE
Note:
When the printer is connected, check the
print result in the printed data output.
・ DTE memory1
・ DTE memory2
:FROM operation
:SDRAM operation
・ DTE LCD&LED
:Data terminal screen and
lamp operation
Note:
Check visually if every dot alternating colors
of red, green, blue and white with the lamp
blink work normally for 5 seconds.
・ DTE buzzer
Note:
6-4
DONE
DONE
OK: Normal
NG: Abnormal
DONE
:DTE buzzer operation
Check if the buzzer sounds correctly. After 3
seconds, sounding stops automatically
DONE
Maintenance & Inspection
6.3 System alarm indication
This equipment displays alarms as follows when an internal or external error is detected.
Alarm information
PA
PA
Note
:001,Overcurrent(A)
:008,High-temp
To return to the previous screen after the alarm is displayed, press the
CANCEL key.
When the TRX 024.PLL unlock or WKR MODEM 030.PLL unlock alarm is
occurring, that mark remains as shown below until the equipment is restored
to normal conditions.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL ITU- 401
RX 4357.0 kHz
TX 4065.0 kHz
SIG
WKR scan bands:
Unlock
Unlock
NonDST:
DROBOS:
EdtDST:
6-5
Maintenance & Inspection
6.3.1
Alarm list
The following list shows the types of system alarms and contents when an alarm is detected on
the equipment.
(*) 500W model only
Alarm
Number
Source
Unit
001
PA
Overcurrent (A)
Detected an overcurrent (6.8A at
AC, or 5.1A at DC) in the PA(A).
Troubleshooting
Procedure
Re-tune or operate on
another frequency.
002
PA
Overload (A)
Detected the condition SWR > 3 in
the PA(A).
Re-tune or operate on
another frequency.
003
PA
Overcurrent (B) *
Detected an overcurrent (6.8A at
AC, or 5.1A at DC) in the PA(B).
Re-tune or operate on
another frequency.
004
PA
Overload (B) *
Detected the condition SWR > 3 in
the PA(B).
Re-tune or operate on
another frequency.
007
PA
SWR/Overload
Detected the condition SWR > 3 or
overload at the PA output.
Re-tune or operate on
another frequency.
008
PA
High-temp
On TX, detected high temp (99°C or
more) at the radiator in the PA unit.
Stop transmission, or
reduce output.
010
PA
RBK overcurrent
Detected RBK overcurrent.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
011
PA
High-VDD (A)
012
PA
Low-VDD (A)
013
PA
High-VDD (B) *
014
PA
Low-VDD (B) *
066
PA
DA high-temp
067
PA
068
Display
Contents
Detected overvoltage (132V or more)
at the drain of the FET in the PA(A).
Detected low voltage (80V or less)
at the drain of the PA(A) FET.
Detected overvoltage (132V or more)
at the drain of the FET in the PA(B).
Detected low voltage (80V or less)
at the drain of the PA(B) FET.
Detected high temperature (95°C or
more) at the radiator of the DA.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
High-temp (A)
Detected high temperature (99°C or
more) at the radiator of the PA(A).
Stop transmission, or
reduce output.
PA
High-temp (B) *
Detected high temperature (99°C or
more) at the radiator of the PA(B).
Stop transmission, or
reduce output.
070
PA
EEPROM (PA)
Detected the PA memory error.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
091
PA
EEPROM
(PACONT)
Detected a memory error at the PA
CONTROL UNIT.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
071
PS
PS for PA
Detected abnormal condition (high
temp/voltage) of the PS for PA.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
017
ATU
ATU lost
Detected a serial communication
error with the tuner.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
018
ATU
High voltage
Detected a high voltage (3.5 kV or
more) in antenna output.
Re-tune,
output.
019
ATU
High-temp
Detected an out-of-range temperature
(70°C or more) inside the enclosure.
Stop transmission, or
reduce output.
072
ATU
Overcurrent
Detected
antenna.
Re-tune,
output.
020
TRX
DISP_KEY
Detected abnormal ON signal at the
PTT or Ext key of the controller.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
021
TRX
EXT_KEY
Detected abnormal ON signal at the
transceiver external key.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
022
TRX
SEL_BK
Detected abnormal ON signal at
the Selcall key on the transceiver.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
023
TRX
-BK
Detected the -BK output
during transmission.
error
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
024
TRX
PLL unlock
Detected PLL unlock for the DDS
or DUC clock.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
030
WKR
MODEM
PLL unlock
Detected PLL unlock for the DDS
clock.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
031
WKR
MODEM
MCDSP WDT
Detected MCDSP malfunction.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
032
WKR
MODEM
VDSP WDT
Detected VDSP malfunction.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
6-6
an
overcurrent
at
the
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
Stop transmission, or
reduce output.
or
or
reduce
reduce
Maintenance & Inspection
033
WKR
MODEM
MMSI lost
Detected non-registration or loss
of the ship's MMSI.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
094
WKR
MODEM
Memory
Detected a memory error.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
035
Controller
CTRL1 RBK OC
Detected an overcurrent on the
RBK circuit of controller 1.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
036
Controller
CTRL1 PTT
Detected an error on the PTT control
line of controller 1.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
037
Controller
CTRL1 CW KEY
Detected an error on the CW key control
line of controller 1.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
038
Controller
CTRL1 EXT KEY
Detected an error on the external key
control line of controller 1.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
039
Controller
CTRL2 RBK OC
Detected an overcurrent on the
RBK circuit of controller 2.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
040
Controller
CTRL2 PTT
Detected an error on the PTT control
line of controller 2.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
041
Controller
CTRL2 CW KEY
Detected an error on the CW key control
line of controller 2.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
042
Controller
CTRL2 EXT KEY
Detected an error on the external key
control line of controller 2.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
047
Controller
PA lost
Detected a serial communication
error with the PA.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
048
Controller
TRX lost
Detected a serial communication
error with the TRX.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
050
Controller
MODEM lost
Detected a serial communication
error with the WKR MODEM.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
051
Controller
CTRL1 lost
Detected a serial communication
error with the No.1 controller.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
052
Controller
CTRL2 lost
Detected a serial communication
error with the No.2 controller.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
095
Controller
CTRL1 memory
Detected a memory error on the
No.1 controller.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
096
Controller
CTRL2 memory
Detected a memory error on the
No.2 controller.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
059
Data
terminal
My/OTH DTE lost
060
Data
terminal
My/OTH DTE lost
062
Data
terminal
My/OTH DTE
USB-IC
063
Data
terminal
My/OTH DTE
USB-IC
Detected a serial communication
error between controller (ID:1)
and DTE.
Note) My or OTH indicates the
relationship between that data
terminal
and
the
controller
displaying this alarm.
Detected a serial communication
error between controller (ID:2)
and DTE.
Note) My or OTH indicates the
relationship between that data
terminal
and
the
controller
displaying this alarm.
Detected the SPI communication
error at the USB circuit of the
data terminal connected to the
controller (ID:1).
Note) My or OTH indicates the
relationship between that data
terminal
and
the
controller
displaying this alarm.
Detected the SPI communication
error at the USB circuit of the
data terminal connected to the
controller (ID:2).
Note) My or OTH indicates the
relationship between that data
terminal
and
the
controller
displaying this alarm.
Check the data
terminal cable
connection, or the
condition of the data
terminal.
Check the data
terminal cable
connection, or the
condition of the data
terminal.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
Please contact JRC or
our agency.
6-7
Maintenance & Inspection
Also, the following alarms are displayed when an error is detected just after turning on the
equipment. Please notify JRC or our agency of the details of the alarm.
Display
Detected this controller's barcode number lost!
So required to replace the CONTROL UNIT in it
with the new one.
Detected this controller's SIO error!
So required initial set after restarting as the
maintenance mode.
Detected this controller's address setting error!
So required initial set after restarting as the
maintenance mode.
Detected MMSI lost!
So concerned DSC functions no longer available
now.
Detected PA UNIT lost or this controller's SIO error!
So required initial set after restarting as the
maintenance mode.
Detected TRX UNIT lost!
So concerned all functions no longer available
now.
6-8
Contents
Detected an error in the barcode number on the
controller.
Detected a communication error between
controller and transceiver at startup.
Detected this controller's
starting the controller.
address
error
the
when
Unregistered MMSI, or lost the MMSI.
Detected
malfunction
of
the
PA
communication error on the controller.
Detected TRX unit malfunction.
unit
or
Maintenance & Inspection
6.3.2
Viewing the alarm history
The following describes how to view alarm information detected by the equipment or a history of
past occurring alarms in the 6.2 Alarm information menu.
■ Procedure ■
11.. Press the
MENU key, and through
hierarchical menus, select 6.2 Alarm
information.
One of the screens shown at right is
displayed indicating if an alarm is
occurring .
6.2)Alarm information
No data
Press ENT to view alarm history.
(If there is no alarm)
6.2)Alarm information
Note
The displayed alarm information is
formatted as follows.
PA
PA
:001,Overcurrent(A)
:008,High-temp
[Unit Name] : [Alarm Number], [Information]
Press ENT to view alarm history.
(If there is an alarm)
22.. To check the alarm history, press ENT.
The popup screen at right is displayed,
select OK.
6.2)Alarm information
View alarm history?
No data
[ OK ]
[Cancel]
Press ENT to view alarm history.
33.. The alarm history is displayed.
Up to 100 of the latest histories are stored.
If necessary, scroll with the jog dial.
Note
The displayed alarm history is
formatted as follows.
Alarm history
1.2008-12-31 23:59 A
PA
:001,Overcurrent(A)
2.2008-12-31 23:59 A
PA
:008,High-temp
3.2008-11-30 22:45 V
ATU :019,High-temp
4.2008-11-28 22:11 V
ATU :018,High voltage
[Number] [Alarm & recovery time] [A: Alarm/V: Recovery]
[Unit name] : [Alarm number], [Information]
6-9
Maintenance & Inspection
6.4 Software version
■ Procedure ■
To view the version of the software currently
running on the equipment, press the MENU
key, and display 6.3 Software version in the
menu list.
¾ Each software version of the transceiver,
the controller and the data terminal is
displayed as shown at right.
¾ Besides above, the software version of the
data terminal is displayed through the Help
menu.
6-10
6.3)Software version
- Controller
- WKR MODEM
- TRX
- PA
- ATU
- DTE
0.Back
:05.00
:03.00
:01.00
:01.00
:01.00
:01.00
Maintenance & Inspection
6.5 Troubleshooting
WARNING
This equipment is used for both distress communication and routine
communication.
Contact JRC or our agent if any problem is observed in this unit during routine
operation or inspection.
Do not open the equipment to inspect or repair internal circuits. Inspection
or repairs by anyone other than a specialized technician may result in fire,
electrical shock, or malfunction.
If internal inspection or repair is necessary, contact our service center or
agents.
6.5.1
Procedures for locating malfunctions
1)
2)
First, check the power supply voltage and connectors.
If there are no problems with the above, use a tester to check for errors.
The following table shows the instruments required for performing repairs and the severity of
malfunctions. If the user is to locate the malfunction himself, perform only No. 1 and No. 2.
No.
Type of Malfunction
Examples
Faulty connector contacts
Broken antenna cables
Defective switches, controls, etc.
Other problems that can be visually detected
Faults requiring no instrument to locate
・
・
・
・
Malfunctions that can be discovered
and repaired with a tester
・ Confirmation of power supply voltage
・ Breaks in external wiring
Malfunctions requiring special instrument
・ Fan malfunction in transceiver and ATU
enclosure fan
・ Crystal oscillator frequency deviation
・ Decrease in transmitting power and reception
sensitivity
・ Decrease in transmitter modulation level
・ Malfunction in semiconductors, ICs, and similar
devices
6-11
Maintenance & Inspection
6.5.2
Guide to locating faults
Use the following table as a guide to locating the causes of malfunctions in the equipment. Also,
when contacting JRC or our agency, please notify us of the malfunction conditions.
No.
Symptom
Typical causes
Nothing is displayed on the
controller or the data terminal
screen.
x Malfunction in the controller or data terminal cable
x Abnormal power supply voltage
x Malfunction in the power switch, display circuit or control
circuit
TX and ON is displayed but no
voice is transmitted in the TEL
mode.
x Malfunction in the handset
x Malfunction in the controller cable
x Malfunction in the AF signal transmission circuit
TX is displayed but ON is not,
and transmission is not possible.
x Malfunction in the transmission circuit
TX and ON are displayed, and
transmission is not possible.
x Malfunction in the handset PTT switch (TEL mode)
x Malfunction in the electrical key connection (CW mode)
x Malfunction in the transmission circuit
Reception sensitivity is poor.
Little or no sound from the
speaker, both static and voices.
x Malfunction in the speaker
x Malfunction in the receiver circuit
Radio static (noise) is output
from the speaker, but cannot
receive transmissions from other
stations.
Note
Antenna damage
Break or short circuit of antenna cable
Malfunction in the antenna connectors
Malfunction in the receiver circuit
Antenna damage
Break or short circuit of antenna cable
Malfunction in the antenna connectors
Malfunction in the receiver
The following are not faults.
Symptom
Possible Causes
Handling
Both Tx & Rx functions are invalid,
and the SIG meter indicates
off-the-scale.
The external BK line is ON.
Stop operating the external
equipment.
The VOL control, the dimmer, and
PWR key on the controller are valid
but functions such as the RF GAIN
control are invalid.
Multiple controllers are connected,
and another controller has access
rights.
Press ENT to obtain access
rights, and after that, retry
the operation.
No response from other station via
radiotelephone or DSC call.
No operator in that station, or
unavailable to respond due to other
duties.
Wait and retry later.
When multiple controllers are
connected, access rights cannot be
obtained by pressing ENT on a
monitor controller.
Another controller with higher
priority is in use for communicating
or is performing menu operations.
After operations on the other
controller are finished,
obtain access rights.
If the system is left on a screen
other than the status display for a
while, the screen returns to the
status display.
The inactivity timer is activated and
the menu is closed.
Set the timer with the 7.3.6
Menu shutdown.
The received distress call log has
been erased without operation.
Automatically deleted the received
distress calls of 48 hours old after
that reception. (IMO A.806(19))
Or the equipment had been turned
off by such as the breaker on the
power supply.
Print and save received
messages if necessary.
When turning on the data terminal,
the start screen is displayed. But
after that, nothing is displayed.
The dimmer level is adjusted to 0
with such as Ctrl+È operation.
6-12
Adjust the dimmer level with
the DIM key on the panel of
the data terminal or Ctrl+Ç
operation.
Maintenance & Inspection
6.5.3
Consumables
The following shows consumables. Please contact JRC or our agency to order parts.
Location
Description
Model (Part number)
NKG-91 PRINTER
Printer paper
7ZPJD0384
DPU-414 PRINTER
Printer paper
6ZCAF00252A
Printer paper
5ZPCM00020
Ink ribbon (SP-16051)
5ZZCM00003
Replacement Guide
Indicating red
paper edge
mark
on
the
NKG-800 PRINTER
6.5.4
When print becomes light
Repair units/parts
The repair units and replacement part units are as follows.
NTD-2250/ 2500
TRANSCEIVER
Description
Model (Part number)
Notes
PA CONTROL UNIT
CMC-2425/ 2450
PA UNIT
CAH-2425/ 2450
LPF UNIT
CFJ-2425/ 2450
EXTERNAL UNIT
CQD-2419
Common for 250W and 500W
TRX UNIT
CMN-2250
Common for 250W and 500W
WKR MODEM UNIT
CMJ-2250
Common for 250W and 500W
NBD-2250/ 2500
POWER SUPPLY
Description
Model (Part number)
Notes
DC_DC UNIT
CBG-2415
Common for 250W and 500W
PA_PS UNIT
CBG-2416
Common for 250W and 500W
Note) 2pcs for 500W
FILTER UNIT
CBL-2415
Common for 250W and 500W
Air filter
MTZ304438A
Everlight scott filter
NCM-2150
MF/HF CONTROLLER
Description
Model (Part number)
CONTROL UNIT
CDJ-3775
AF CONT UNIT
CMV-3775
LCD UNIT
CDE-3770
MAIN PANEL UNIT
CCK-3775
SUB PANEL UNIT
CCK-3776
SPEAKER
7USJD0007
CONTROLLER CABLE
7ZCJD0343
Notes
Control cable (5 m)
6-13
Maintenance & Inspection
NFC-2250/ 2500
ANTENNA TUNER
Description
Model (Part number)
Notes
MATCHING UNIT
CFG-2250
For 250W only
MATCHING A UNIT
CFG-2500
For 500W only
MATCHING B UNIT
CFG-2503
For 500W only
ANT SW UNIT
CSD-2250/ 2500
TUNER CONT
CDJ-2525
NDZ-227 DATA TERMINAL
Description
Model (Part number)
PROCESS CIRCUIT
CDC-1346B
INTERFACE UNIT
CMH-3227
COLOR LCD UNIT
CCN-3227
LCD I/F UNIT
CQC-1262
USB I/F UNIT
CQD-3227
Notes
10.4 inch
NBB-714 BATTERY CHARGER
Description
Model (Part number)
AC fuse
7ZFJD0002
NBB714_Dustfilter
NBB714-FIL
NBB714_Fan
NBB714-FAN
Common for 250W and 500W
Notes
10A
NBB-724 BATTERY CHARGER
Description
Model (Part number)
NBB724_Dustfilter
NBB724-FIL
NBB724_Fan
NBB724-FAN
6.5.5
Notes
Regular replacement parts
The following shows parts that need to be replaced regularly. Please contact JRC or our agency
to order parts.
Description
Model (Part number)
Replacement Period
Cooling fan for PA and PS
7BZJD0006
Approx. 50,000 hours of use at
room temperature
Cooling fan for ATU
7BZJD0008
Approx. 50,000 hours of use at
room temperature
LCD unit for controller
CDE-3770
Approx. 20,000 hours of continued
use at maximum brightness
LCD unit for data terminal
CCN-3227
Approx. 50,000 hours of continued
use at maximum brightness
6-14
After-Sales Service
7. AFTER-SALES SERVICE
★ Warranty
The
warranty period
is determined by JRC's warranty regulations, but is normally
1 year from the date of purchase. Additionally, the warranty except for the body text is
submitted to contractual agreements.
★ Repair Part Inventory Period
Parts necessary for proper functioning of this equipment will be kept available for 10
years after product discontinuation.
★ When Requesting Repairs
If what appears to be a defect is detected, refer to "6.5 Troubleshooting" to check if
the equipment is actually defective.
If the problem is due to a defect, immediately stop use of the system and contact the
store where you purchased the system, or one of our branches.
During the warranty period , if a malfunction occurs with the equipment while
in standard usage in accordance with this instruction manual, we or our
agencies will repair the malfunction at no charge at the store where the
equipment was purchased or another location specified by JRC. If the
malfunction occurs due to improper usage, fault (including the use of the virusinfected USB flash memory), or any external abnormal condition such as fire,
pollution, abnormal voltage, natural disaster (ex. thunder storms, earthquake)
etc., JRC will repair the equipment for a fee. Furthermore, regardless of the
warranty period, orders of consumables will be charged.
After the warranty expires , we will repair the malfunction for a fee, if repair is
possible.
Please inform us of the following :
☆
Product name, model name, manufactured date, serial number
☆
As much information as you can provide about the malfunction (alarm
number, whether transmission is possible or not, etc.)
☆
Your company or organization name, address, and phone number
★ Periodical Maintenance Recommendation
Depending on the usage conditions, with extended use, the performance of this
equipment may degrade over time, and externally installed parts such as the antenna
may degrade due to vibration, so we recommend periodical maintenance in addition
to the standard maintenance.
Please contact the store where you purchased the equipment, or one of our
branches, to request periodical maintenance.
Periodical maintenance requires a service charge.
If you have any questions regarding after-sales service, please contact the store where
you purchased the equipment, or one of our branches.
Refer to the inside of the back cover for contact numbers and locations.
7-1
Disposal
8. DISPOSAL
Observe all rules and regulations of the local authorities when disposing of this
equipment.
8-1
Specifications
9. SPECIFICATIONS
9.1 JSS-2250/2500 MF/HF Radio Equipment
General Specifications
Transmission frequency
Reception frequency
Frequency stability
Type of emission
Channels
Scan channels
Nominal frequency
Communication method in TEL
Antenna impedance
Channel switching duration
Interface
Compass safety distance
Main controls
Performance criteria
1605.0 - 27500.0 kHz (100 Hz steps)
90.0 - 29999.9 kHz (100 Hz steps)
Within ±10 Hz
TEL mode
: J3E
DSC/TLX mode
: F1B
CW mode
: A1A
AM mode
: H3E
H2B mode
: H2B
DATA mode
: J2D
User channels (TEL/DSC/CW) : Max. 400 ch (20 ch x 20 grp)
User channels (TLX)
: Max. 400 ch (20 ch x 20 sta)
ITU preset channels
: 1722 ch
Max. 20 channels (group specification method)
J3E/ A1A/ H3E/ H2B/ J2D
: Carrier frequencies
F1B
: Assigned frequency
Push-to-talk (simplex, semi-duplex)
50Ω unbalanced
15 sec or less
IEC61162-1 (GPS/AME/RMS)
2.0 m
DSC call (sending and receiving), communication freq/
channel settings, Tx power settings, RF gain adjustment,
volume adjustment, LCD adjustment
Continuous operation (TEL)
Continuous operation (DSC,WKR)
Category type of
the weather resistance
Protection rating
Dimensions and mass (approx)
IMO A.806(19), A.694(17), MSC68(68), MSC/Circ.862
IEC 60945 Ed.4 2002-08
90 VAC to 132 VAC, 180 VAC to 264 VAC
24 VDC (21.6 VDC to 31.2 VDC)
AC
: 2kVA / 3kVA
Transmission
24VDC
: 40A
/ 40A
Reception
AC
: 0.5kVA / 0.5kVA
24VDC
: 6A
/ 6A
-30 to +55 o C (-15 to +55 o C during normal operation)
-30 to +55°C (parts exposed to condensation -30 to +70°C)
No abnormality after standing 10 hours in +40°C, 93%RH
2 Hz - 5 Hz to 13.2 Hz : Full amplitude ±1 mm±10%
13.2 Hz to 100 Hz
: Max acceleration 7 m/s fixed
No abnormality after testing resonance points or at 30 Hz for 2 hours
No abnormality after operating continuously for 8 hours
No abnormality after operating continuously for 24 hours
Antenna tuner and the junction box : Exposed
Other units
: Protected
IP22 equivalent (controller panel)
Main unit (Incase of the NCU-515A Rack)
(JSS-2250/ 2500)
520mm(W) x 665mm(H) x 450mm(D) [ex. projections], 90kg/96kg
Power supply voltage
Current consumption
(JSS-2250/ 2500)
Operating temperature range
Storage temperature range
Humidity resistance
Vibration resistance (3 axes)
Antenna tuner
395mm(W) x 622mm(H) x 198mm(D) [ex. projections], 10kg/10kg
MF/HF controller
230mm(W) x 142mm(H) x 89mm(D) [ex. projections], 1.3kg
Data terminal
336mm(W) x 244mm(H) x 88mm(D) [ex. projections], 4.6kg
9-1
Specifications
Transmitter
Antenna output power
(JSS-2250/ 2500)
Modulation method
Occupied bandwidth
Carrier suppression (J3E)
Unwanted emissions in the
out-of-band domain
AC
： 200Wpep / 400Wpep
24VDC ： 100Wpep / 100Wpep
AC
： 250Wpep / 500Wpep
24VDC ： 150Wpep / 150Wpep
Low-power stage balanced modulation
J3E/ J2D/ H2B
: Within 3 kHz
F1B/ A1A
: Within 0.5 kHz
40 dB or more
Mean power of 50 mW or lower, or 67/70 dB or more lower
than the mean power of the basic frequency
1605.0
- 3999.9 kHz
4000.0
- 27500.0 kHz
(JSS-2250/ 2500)
Unwanted emissions in the
spurious domain
JSS-2250/2500
At J3E:
1.5 to 4.5 kHz
4.5 to 7.5 kHz
7.5 kHz and upwards
At F1B:
0.25 to 0.5 kHz
0.50 to 1.25 kHz
1.25 kHz and upwards
: 28/28 dB or more
: 35/35 dB or more
: 64/67 dB or more
: 28/28 dB or more
: 35/35 dB or more
: 67/70 dB or more
And following
Attenuation [dB]
Mistuned frequency [Hz]
Overall distortion and noise
AF frequency response
Tone frequency
Receiver
Receiving system
1st IF
2nd IF
Reception frequency stability
Sensitivity (SINAD 20dB)
Pass band/Adjacent signal
selectivity
Spurious response
Blocking/Desensitization
9-2
-20 dB or less
Deviation is within 6 dB in 350 Hz to 2700 Hz range.
1500 Hz or 1400 Hz
Double superheterodyne
70.036 MHz
36 kHz
Within ±10 Hz
J3E
: 2.5 uV or less (1605.0 to 27500.0 kHz)
F1B
: 0.7 uV or less (1605.0 to 27500.0 kHz)
A1A
: 1.4 uV or less (1605.0 to 27500.0 kHz)
J3E
: 2.4 - 3.0 kHz
(6 dB bandwidth) within
±2.1 kHz
(66 dB bandwidth)
F1B
: 270 - 300Hz
(6 dB bandwidth) within
±550 Hz
(60 dB bandwidth)
J3E
: 60 dB or more
F1B
: Symbol error rate of 1% or better at a wanted
signal level of 10 uV and an unwanted signal
level of 31.6 mV separated by 750 Hz
J3E
: When an unwanted signal level separated by 3
kHz is added to the wanted signal level of 10
uV, the unwanted signal input voltage
suppressing output of the wanted signal by 3
dB is 10 mV or more.
F1B
: Symbol error rate of 1% or better at a wanted
signal level of 10 uV and an unwanted signal
level of 1 mV separated by 500 Hz
Specifications
Overall distortion and noise
Conducted spurious emission
Clarifier variable range
Antenna impedance
Line output
When an input signal level of 30 uV is applied, the ratio
between low-frequency output 1000 Hz and unwanted
components contained in that output is 30 dB or more.
Power emitted from antenna terminal is 2 nW or less (9kHz
- 2GHz) and 20 nW or less (2GHz - 4GHz).
±200 Hz (1 Hz steps)
50Ω unbalanced
0 dBm 600Ω (balanced)
DSC Watch Keeping Receiver
Reception frequency
Distress and safety frequencies of 2187.5 kHz and 8414.5
kHz, and additionally on one or more of the 4207.5 kHz/
6312.0 kHz/ 12577.0 kHz/ 16804.5 kHz
Receiving system
Double superheterodyne
1st IF
40.04025 MHz
2nd IF
40.25 kHz
Frequency stability
Within ±10 Hz
Sensitivity
1% or lower symbol error rate at reception input voltage of
1µV
Passband
6 dB bandwidth
: 270 - 300 Hz
30 dB bandwidth
: Within ±380 Hz
60 dB bandwidth
: Within ±550 Hz
Spurious response
Symbol error rate of 1% or better when an unwanted signal
level of 31.6 mV is applied to a wanted signal level of 10
uv from an intermediate frequency separated by 750 Hz or
more through to a frequency 3x the test frequency
Blocking/Desensitization
Symbol error rate of 1% or better at a wanted signal level
of 10 uV and an unwanted signal level of 1 mV separated
by 500 Hz
Conducted spurious emission
Power emitted from antenna terminal is 2 nW or less.
Antenna impedance
50Ω unbalanced
DSC Modem
Modulation rate
Modulation method
Mark frequency (Y)
Space frequency (B)
DSC Protocol
DSC operation standards
DSC code
Message storage
NBDP Modem
Modulation rate
Modulation method
Mark frequency (Y)
Space frequency (B)
NBDP Protocol
Within 100 baud ±30ｘ 10 - 6
FSK (sub-carrier: 1700 Hz)
Transmission
: Within 1615 Hz ±0.5 Hz
Reception (permissible value) : Within 1615 Hz ±20 Hz
Transmission
: Within 1785 Hz ±0.5 Hz
Reception (permissible value) : Within 1785 Hz ±20 Hz
ITU-R recommendation M.493-13 (Class A and B)
ITU-R recommendation M.541-9, M.821-1
10-bit error detecting code
20 Rx distress, 20 Rx others, 20 Tx messages
Within 100baud ±30ｘ 10
-6
以内
FSK （ sub-carrier： 1700Hz）
Transmission
Reception (permissible value) :
Transmission
Reception (permissible value) :
Within
Within
Within
Within
1615
1615
1785
1785
Hz
Hz
Hz
Hz
±0.5 Hz
±20 Hz
±0.5 Hz
±20 Hz
ITU-R recommendation M.476-5,M.491-1,M.492-6,M.625-4
ITU-T recommendation F.1, F.130, S.6
NBDP code
7-bit error detecting code
9-3
Specifications
Antenna tuner
Frequency range
Maximum input power
1605.0 - 27500.0 kHz
1605.0 - 3999.9 kHz
250Wpep
/ 500Wpep
(JSS-2250/ 2500)
4000.0 - 27500.0 kHz
300Wpep
/ 700Wpep
SWR after tuning
Tuning method
Tuning time
Power supply
2:1 or less
Preset or auto-tuning
Preset tuning: 0.5 seconds, auto-tuning: max. 45 seconds
24 VDC (21.6 VDC to 24.7 VDC)
MF/HF controller
Communication speed
Communication interface
Microphone input impedance
Standard modulation input
Audio output
LCD display
Data terminal
Communication speed
57.6 kbps
RS-485 and RS-232C, and Centronics compliant
150Ω balanced
-54 dBm
Internal loud speaker (8Ω) : 5W max
External speaker impedance : 8Ω or more
Handset phone (150Ω)
: Rated 1mW or more
3.8 inch FSTN monochrome, 320 x 240 dot, LED backlight
4.8kbps
Communication interface
RS-232C
USB interface
USB 2.0, FAT16/32 file format
Keyboard interface
PS/2
Printer interface
Centronics compliant
LCD display
10.4 inch TFT color, 640x480 dots, CCFL backlight
Standard brightness 450cd/m , Viewing angle 160 ﾟ/140 ﾟ
Contrast
●
600： 1
Keyboard
Communication interface
Serial two wire interactive transmission
Connector
Mini DIN 5Pin
Durability
20,000,000 times
●
Printer (NKG-800/NKG-900)
Printing system
Communication interface
Supported fonts
Paper feed system
Paper type
Buffer size
Density adjustment
Power supply voltage
Power consumption
9-4
Serial impact dot matrix
Centronics compliant
ANK FX850 mode
324 characters
IBM Proprinter II mode
264 characters
Roll paper holder
209 - 216 mm (8.23 - 8.50") roll paper
ANK FX850 mode
21 kbytes
IBM Proprinter II mode
9.3 kbytes
Manual (non-stepped)
10.2 VDC - 31.2 VDC
Maximum 35 W
Specifications
9.2 Options
(1) Battery charger (NBB-714)
Source voltage
Current consumption
Charging current
Charging circuit/ characteristic
90 VAC to 132 VAC or 180 VAC to 264 VAC (50/60 Hz)
Charging
: 8 A or less (100 VAC input)
4 A or less (220 VAC input)
Discharging
: 0.3 A or less (at 24 VDC ope)
Maximum 10 A
Floating charge
16 VDC or more: Constant voltage or current characteristic
Less than 16 VDC: Reduced current characteristic*
(*) Foldback current limiting characteristic
Functions
Alarm type
Temperature range for full performance
Operating temperature range
Storage temperature range
Humidity resistance
Vibration resistance (3 axes)
(2) Battery charger (NBB-724)
Source voltage
Current consumption
Charging current
Charging circuit/ characteristic
Overvoltage input protection, Reverse polarity protection,
Dimmer lamp, Alarm mute with remote control
Batt low/high voltage, Internal temperature, AC fail,
Other abnormal charging
-15°C - +55°C
-15°C - +55°C
-25°C - +65°C
No abnormality after standing 10 hours in +40°C, 93% RH
2 Hz - 5 Hz to 13.2 Hz:
: Full amplitude ±1 mm±10%
13.2 Hz to 100 Hz:
: Maximum
acceleration
m/s fixed
No abnormality after testing resonance points or at 30 Hz
for more than 2 hours
90 VAC to 132 VAC or 180 VAC to 264 VAC (50/60 Hz)
Charging
: 15 A or less (100 VAC input)
8 A or less (220 VAC input)
Discharging
: 0.5 A or less (at 24 VDC ope)
Maximum 22 A (Common to Floating & Equalizing charge)
Floating charge and equalizing charge
18 VDC or more: Constant voltage or current characteristic
Less than 18 VDC: Reduced current characteristic*
(*) Foldback current limiting characteristic
Functions
Alarm type
Temperature range for full performance
Operating temperature range
Storage temperature range
Humidity resistance
Vibration resistance (3 axes)
Overvoltage input protection, Reverse polarity protection,
Dimmer lamp, Float/Equal changing, DC ope, Batt temp
Batt low/high voltage, Internal temperature,
Other abnormal charging
-15°C - +55°C
-15°C - +55°C
-25°C - +65°C
No abnormality after standing 10 hours in +40°C, 93% RH
2 Hz - 5 Hz to 13.2 Hz:
: Full amplitude ±1 mm±10%
13.2 Hz to 100 Hz:
: Maximum
acceleration
m/s fixed
No abnormality after testing resonance points or at 30 Hz
for more than 2 hours
9-5
Specifications
(3) Printer (NKG-91)
Printing system
Communication interface
Data control
Data buffer
Maximum print speed
Roll paper width
Power supply voltage
Current consumption
Thermal line dot
RS-232C, 4.8/9.6/38.4 kbps
RTS/CTS
4096 byte
20 mm/sec or more
58 mm
6.5 VDC (5 VDC to 8.7 VDC)
Maximum 2 A
(4) Printer (DPU-414)
Printing system
Communication interface
Data control
Data buffer
Maximum print speed
Roll paper width
Power voltage
Current consumption
Thermal serial dot
RS-232C, 4.8k/9.6k/38.4 kbps
HW busy
About 28 Kbyte
52.5 cps
112 mm
6.5 VDC
Maximum 2 A
9-6
Specifications
9.3 Peripheral interfaces
(1) GPS or other navigation aid interface
Interface standard
NMEA0183/ IEC61162-1 Ed.4 (2010-11) compliant
Protocol
4800 bps, start 1 bit, data 8 bit, stop 1 bit
Non parity
NMEA0183
Input sentence
V1.5:
V2.0:
V2.3:
(Talker = "GP" or other)
GGA/ GLL/ RMC
GGA/ GLL/ RMC/ ZDA
GGA/ GLL/ RMC/ GNS/ ZDA
Data type
Ship position & time information: GGA/ GNS/ GLL/ RMC
Date information:
ZDA/ RMC
Equipment time information:
ZDA/ GGA/ GNS/ GLL/ RMC
(1.1) Electrical description
CQD-2417
TERMINAL
BOARD
CMC-2425/2450
PA CONTROL
UNIT
CMN-2250
TRX UNIT
CMJ-2250
WKR MODEM UNIT
TR501
TB204
GPS_RX-A
26
GPS_RX-B
27
J202
J102
J172
W30
J1111
W13
J1131
W14
R542
J502
R541
TR502
R543
R544
R541, R543: 270
R542, R544: 10k
■
+3.3V
R540
3.3k
CD503
PHT501
Load requirements
Current consumption
： 2mA at 2V or less
Maximum input voltage
： ±15V or more
Recommended operating current
： 2mA or more
9-7
Specifications
(1.2) List of sentences and associated data fields
(1.2.1)
GGA – Global positioning system (GPS) fix data
$--GGA, hhmmss, llll.ll, a, yyyyy.yy, a, x, xx, x.x, x.x, M, x.x, M, x.x, xxxx *hh
Differential reference
station ID, 0000-1023
Age of differential GPS data
Units of geoidal separation, m
Geoidal separation
Units of antenna altitude, m
Antenna altitude above/below mean sea level
(geoid)
Horizontal dilution of precision
Number of satellites in use, 00-12, may be different
from the number in view
GPS quality indicator
Longitude E/W
Latitude N/S
UTC of position
(1.2.2)
GLL – Geographic position – Latitude/longitude
$--GLL, llll.ll, a, yyyyy.yy, a, hhmmss.ss, A, a *hh
Mode indicator:
A = Autonomous, D = Differential, E = Estimated
M = Manual input, S = Simulator, N = Data not valid
Status: A= data valid, V= data invalid
UTC of position
Longitude, E/W
Latitude, N/S
9-8
Specifications
(1.2.3)
RMC – Recommended minimum specific GNSS data
$--RMC, hhmmss.ss, A, llll.ll, a, yyyyy.yy, a, x.x, x.x, xxxxxx, x.x, a, a, a *hh
Navigational status
Mode indicator:
A = Autonomous, D = Differential,
E = Estimated, F = Float RTK,
M = Manual input, N = Data not valid
P = Precise, R = Real Time Kinematic
S = Simulator,
Magnetic variation, degrees, E/W
Date: dd/mm/yy
Course over ground, degrees true
Speed over ground, knots
Longitude, E/W
Latitude, N/S
Status: A = data valid, V = navigation receiver warning
UTC of position fix
(1.2.4)
GNS – GNSS fix data
$--GNS, hhmmss.ss, llll.ll, a, yyyyy.yy, a, c---c, xx, x.x, x.x, x.x, x.x, x.x, a *hh
Navigational status
Differential reference
station ID
Age of differential data
Geoidal separation, m
Antenna altitude, m, re: mean-sea-level
(geoid)
HDOP
Total number of satellites in use, 00-99
Mode indicator:
N = No fix, A = Autonomous, D = Differential,
P = Precise, R = Real Time Kinematic, F = Float RTK,
E = Estimated, M = Manual input, S = Simulator
Longitude, E/W
Latitude, N/S
UTC of position
9-9
Specifications
(1.2.5)
ZDA – Time and date
$--ZDA, hhmmss.ss, xx, xx, xxxx, xx, xx *hh
Local zone minutes, 00 to +59
Local zone hours, 00 h to ±13 h
Year (UTC)
Month, 01 to 12 (UTC)
Day, 01 to 31 (UTC)
UTC
(2) RMS interface
Interface standard
IEC61162-1 compliant
Protocol
4800 bps, start 1 bit, data 8 bit, stop 1 bit
Non parity
Output message
IEC61162-1 compliant proprietary sentence
$PJRCL sentence (for RMS log saving)
$PJRCM sentence
(Device ID = "CT")
Data type
Model number, serial number, self-diagnosis information,
etc.
9-10
Options Operation
10. OPTIONS OPERATION
10.1 Battery charger (NBB-714)
CAUTION
When replacing fuses, always use fuses of the same type.
7 9
10
1. 10A fuse ························
AC mains fuses (2pcs)
2. AC switch ······················
Turns on the AC mains power supply.
3. BATT LOW/HIGH lamp ····
This lamp turns on and the buzzer sounds to indicate low
voltage of the battery (approx. 21.5V). And also turns on and
the buzzer sounds to indicate overvoltage of the battery
(approx. 32.2 ~ 37.0V) and then, turns off the BATT breaker.
4. AC FAIL/ CHG ALARM ····
This lamp turns on and the buzzer sounds to indicate any one
of the following alarms.
・ While the BATT breaker is ON, the AC switch is OFF or any
AC fails such as the power failure or the blowout of fuses.
・ While the AC switch is ON, the BATT breaker is OFF.
・ Over discharge detection (16V or less)
Note) If AC input is ON, charging is available without
tripping the breaker.
・ Overheat detection (+80C)
5. Current meter ················
Indicates the charge current (+) or discharge current (-).
6. ALM MUTE switch ··········
Silences the active alarm buzzer sound.
7. Alarm buzzer
8. Voltage meter ················
Indicates the output voltage of the battery.
9. Dimmer control ··············
Adjusts the dimmer level of alarm lamps.
Note) Unable to turn off completely.
10. BATT breaker ·················
When turned on, connects the internal circuit to the battery,
and after that turning on the AC breaker enables charging of
the battery.
Note that if detected over discharge of the
battery (approx. 19.5V), this breaker trips automatically.
10-1
Options Operation
■ Procedure ■
Turn on the AC switch and the BATT breaker to start charging the battery.
¾
The AC FAIL/CHG ALARM is activated if the AC switch and BATT breaker are turned ON
at different timing. However it is due to the notification function of the switch/breaker
ON/OFF state and is NOT the alarm for any malfunction.
¾
The NBB-714 is a battery charger for the maintenance free battery only, i.e. the
charging type is floating only and not providing the equalizing charge.
■ Replacing fuses ■
To replace fuses, turn off the AC switch and the BATT breaker first, and then unscrew the
both two fuse cases as shown below to replace them.
Note
Note)
The appearance of the blowout fuses look like normal. So when checking if the
fuses are blown or not, always use the tester.
・
The battery can be used as a secondary power source when the BATT breaker is
ON while the AC breaker is OFF. However in this case, be sure not to cause over
discharge condition.
・
When any alarm is occurred, treat it as follows.
- BATT HIGH ······················
- BATT LOW ·······················
- AC FAIL/CHG ALARM ·········
- High temperature ··············
10-2
When the battery overvoltage (32.2~37.0V) is
detected, trips the BATT breaker. In this case,
turn off the AC switch. And then, after the
voltage is recovered to normal, turn on the AC
switch and the BATT breaker.
Note) In this case, the charge alarm is also
detected due to the BATT breaker trip and the
CHG ALARM is activated.
Carry on charging. This alarm is cleared
automatically after the battery voltage increases
to approx. 23.5V.
- Turn on the AC input/switch.
- After checking that the battery voltage is not
overvoltage, turn on the BATT breaker.
- If the battery is over discharge condition (16V),
turn on both the AC switch and the BATT breaker
to charge the battery.
The built-in charging circuit is disconnected until
the temperature returns to the normal condition
(60℃ or lower) automatically
Options Operation
10.2 Battery charger (NBB-724)
CAUTION
The batteries, except for sealed lead-acid batteries that require no
equalization, should be carried out the equalizing charge at least every six
months
10
1.
AC breaker ·················· When turned on, enables to use the AC mains input.
2.
BATT breaker ··············· When turned on, connects the internal circuit to the battery,
and after that turning on the AC breaker enables charging of
the battery. Note that if detected over discharge of the
battery (approx. 19.5V), this breaker trips automatically.
3.
BATT LOW alarm lamp ··· This lamp turns on and the buzzer sounds to indicate low
voltage of the battery (approx. 21.5V).
4.
CHG alarm lamp ·········· This lamp turns on (or blinks*) and the buzzer sounds to
indicate any one of the following alarms.
・ The BATT breaker is OFF while the AC breaker is ON.
・ Over voltage (equalizing charge voltage + 1.0V)
・ High temperature of the charging circuit (+75℃ ) *
5.
FLOAT charge lamp ······ This lamp turns on during the floating charge operation.
6.
EQUAL charge lamp ····· This lamp turns on during the equalizing charge operation.
7.
CHARGE mode switch ····
8.
Dimmer control ············ Adjusts the dimmer level.
9.
Current meter ·············· Indicates the charge current (+) or discharge current (-).
10. Voltage meter ··············
Changes the charge mode between floating and equalizing charge.
Indicates the output voltage of the battery.
10-3
Options Operation
(1) Charging a battery in the floating mode
■ Procedure ■
Turn on the AC and BATT breakers.
¾
FLOAT lamp turns on during the floating charge operation.
¾
When turning on the AC breaker prior to BATT breaker, CHG alarm lamp turns on and
the buzzer sounds. But this is not malfunction as mentioned above.
(2) Charging a battery in the equalizing mode
■ Procedure ■
11.. Turn on the AC and BATT breakers.
Make sure FLOAT lamp is turned on and the battery charge is started in the floating mode.
22.. Press the CHARGE mode switch.
¾
The lighting lamp is changed from FLOAT to EQUAL to indicate operating in the
equalizing mode.
¾
The charging mode can be switched between FLOAT and EQUAL alternately.
33.. When the equalizing charge is completed, returns to the floating mode automatically.
The equalizing charge is continued until the charge current goes down to approx. 3.0A or
until 10 hours elapse.
Note
・
The battery can be used as a secondary power source when the BATT breaker is
ON while the AC breaker is OFF. However in this case, be sure not to cause over
discharge condition.
・
When any alarm is occurred, treat it as follows.
- BATT LOW ················ Carry on charging. This alarm is cleared automatically
after the battery voltage increases to approx. 23.5V.
- BATT breaker OFF ····· Turn the BATT breaker on.
- Over voltage ············· Turn off the AC and BATT breakers until the battery
voltage returns to the normal condition.
- High temperature ······· The built-in charging circuit is disconnected until the
temperature returns to the normal condition (60 ℃ or
lower) automatically
- Over discharge ·········· When the BATT breaker trips, turn on the breakers in
the order of AC and BATT so that the charge operation
is restarted.
10-4
Options Operation
10.3 Printer (NKG-91)
CAUTION
The thermal head of the NKG-91 printer may be very hot after printing. Do
not touch the thermal head of the printer. Make sure that the thermal head
is cool before replacing the paper or cleaning the thermal head.
The paper used in the NKG-91 printer is heat sensitive. Take the following
precautions when using this paper.
・ Store the paper away from heat, humidity, or heat sources.
・ Do not rub the paper with any hard objects.
・ Do not place the paper near organic solvents.
・ Do not allow the paper to come in contact with polyvinyl chloride film,
erasers, or adhesive tape for long periods of time.
・ Keep the paper away from freshly copied diazo type or wet process copy
paper.
1.
2.
3.
Paper cover open button
Paper cutter
Paper cover
■ Loading the printer paper ■
11.. Press the paper cover open button.
The paper cover will open.
22.. Insert the paper as shown in the diagram at
right.
Position the paper such that the leading edge
extends outside the printer, and press both
sides of the paper cover to close it.
Note
The printer will be turned on and off simultaneously with the equipment.
10-5
Options Operation
10.4 Printer (NKG-800)
CAUTION
The print head of the NKG-800 printer may be very hot after printing. Do
not touch the print head of the printer. Make sure that the print head is cool
before replacing the paper or cleaning the print head.
Do not use the NKG-800 printer if there is no ink ribbon cartridge or paper.
Do not twist the ink ribbon when installing the ink ribbon cartridge.
Before opening and closing the cover of the NKG-800 printer, turn off the
printer. Wait more than 2 seconds after turning the printer off before turning it
back on again so it can initialize correctly.
Roll support cover
Prevents printed roll paper
from being wound back in.
Roll paper
Roll paper cover
Roll paper stand
Roll bar
Passes through
the printing roll
paper.
Roll paper cutter
Paper feed knob
Printer cover
Print head
Contacts the roll
paper for printing.
Operation
panel
Friction lever
When replacing the roll paper,
pull this lever towards the front
before inserting the paper, and
return it towards the back after
paper is inserted.
Power switch
Platen
Paper is fed in contact
with this platen when the
friction lever is pushed
towards the back.
The following shows the functions of the operation panel.
P.PARK
Paper Park
Rewinds the roll
paper.
FF
Feed Form
Feeds paper one
page at a time.
LF
Line Feed
Feeds the paper
one line at a
time.
NLQ
High-quality
Printing
Switches the
printer to the
high-quality
printing mode.
ONLINE
Printer Ready
Setting
The printer is
ready for
printing when
the lamp is lit.
Note 1: Before performing P.PARK/FF/LF/NLQ, press ONLINE to set the printer offline (lamp out).
Note 2: When the printer runs out of roll paper, the P.OUT lamp lights and the printer
automatically goes offline.
10-6
Options Operation
■ Loading the printer paper ■
11.. Turn the printer OFF, loosen the roll paper
stand fixing screws, and slide the stand
backwards to open the printer cover.
At this step, also remove the roll paper cover.
Fixing
screws
22.. Pass the roll bar through the roll paper,
and install the roll paper onto the roll paper
stand paying attention to its orientation.
Roll bar
Roll paper
33.. Pass the roll paper over the guide bar as
shown in the figure at right.
Guide bar
44.. Pull the friction lever towards the front, and
insert the leading edge of the paper into
the rear of the platen. Then, return the
friction lever to the back, and turn the
paper feed knob to feed the paper out.
Platen
55.. Lift the paper load lever up to hold down
paper fed out of the platen.
Paper
load lever
10-7
Options Operation
66.. Return the roll paper cover to its original
position, and place the roll support cover
as shown in the figure at right.
Roll support
cover
Roll paper
cover
77.. Close the printer cover, return the roll
paper stand to its original position, and
tighten the fixing screws.
Note
To perform a print test, turn the printer on with the LF key held down.
To end the print test, turn the printer off.
■ Replacing the ink ribbon ■
11.. Turn the printer on, and following the same
procedure as that in the previous section,
open the printer cover, lift up the ink ribbon
cartridge by holding the projection on the
cartridge, and lift the cartridge up to
remove it.
Projection
Ink ribbon
cartridge
22.. Using the knob on the new cartridge to make
the ribbon taut, manually move the print
head to the left edge, and attach the ribbon
so that it is between the ribbon mask and
print head.
Print head
Knob
Ink ribbon
cartridge
33.. Close the printer cover, return the roll paper
stand to its original position, and tighten the
fixing screws.
Note
10-8
For other details, check the NKG-800 Installation Guide. The printer's operation
mode can be set by the DIP switches. However, leave the DIP switch settings at
their factory defaults (all off) when using the printer connected to the equipment.
Options Operation
10.5 Operations using a SELCALL unit
The JSS-2250/2500 MF/HF radio equipment can be connected to external selective
calling devices for fishing boats (Selcall) to send signals for calling Selcall buoys or
Selcall receivers on ships.
Note
For details on operations of the Selcall device, refer to the manuals of that device.
■ Procedure ■
11.. Finish all menu operations to return the
screen to the status display.
When a transmission is made from the
Selcall device while menus are displayed,
menus can no longer be operated until
transmission ends.
ID 431001234
23:59(UTC)
Pos 89ﾟ59.0123'N
179ﾟ59.6789'E@23:59
(EXT)
TEL ITU- 401
RX 4357.0 kHz
TX 4065.0 kHz
SIG
NonDST:
WKR scan bands: DR O B O S :
2 4 6 8 12 16MHz Ed t D S T :
22.. Set the communication mode to TEL and
the assigned frequency (e.g. 2331.5 kHz)
for transmitting on the Selcall device in
the free frequency input mode. Then tune
the antenna by pressing TAUNNTE key.
In this case, input both the Rx and Tx
frequencies as simplex frequencies.
33.. Operate the
Selcall device to start
transmission.
When transmission is started, the
communications mode automatically
changes to H2B as shown at right.
44.. When transmission ends, the
communications mode returns to the
original mode.
10-9
Options Operation
10-10
Appendix
11. Appendix
This section lists frequencies used for DSC such as frequencies used for routine calls
and frequencies used for safety and distress calls. It also lists the channel list of ITU
frequencies built-in to this equipment and the instructions for operating the MF/HF radio
equipment.
11.1 Frequencies for distress and safety calls
The following is a list of international transmission frequencies (all simplex) used by coast and
ship stations for distress and safety purposes either with DSC, radiotelephone or telex. CH No.
indicates channel numbers preprogrammed to this equipment.
（ DSC）
TRx（ kHz）
2187.5
CH No.
---
401
4207.5
601
6312.0
801
TRx（ kHz）
（ telex）
CH No.
---
TRx（ kHz）
2182.0
---
4125.0
411
4177.5
---
6215.0
611
6268.0
8414.5
833
8291.0
801
8376.5
1201
12577.0
---
12290.0
1287
12520.0
1601
16804.5
---
16420.0
1624
16695.0
Note
（ radiotelephone）
CH No.
---
2174.5
When making DSC calls, the frequencies above can only be used if the
message category is Distress, Urgency, or Safety.
The DSC frequencies listed above are watched by the DSC watch keeping
receiver.
The radiotelephone frequencies other than 8291.0 kHz are the same as the
transmission frequencies of ITU channels 421, 606, 1221 and 1621. However,
when making calls for distress and safety purposes, use these frequencies as
simplex channels.
RR Appendix 15
RR Article 52.221.3
11-1
Appendix
11.2 National DSC frequencies for routine calls
When ship and coast stations call national stations for purposes that are not safety or distress
purposes, normally use the national frequencies allocated by the administrator prior to using the
international frequencies listed later. The frequencies for Japan are as follows. Additionally, the
pair frequencies are used to make a call to the coast station.
Tx (kHz)
4180.5
6275.5
Rx (kHz)
2169.0
4218.0
6326.5
Tx (kHz)
8391.5
12521.0
16721.0
Rx (kHz)
8431.5
12623.0
16844.0
Tx (kHz)
18872.0
22318.0
25175.0
Rx (kHz)
19682.5
22410.0
26103.0
11.3 International DSC frequencies for routine calls
The following international frequencies are used when calling ship and coast stations via DSC if
the other station's nationality or the frequency they are watching is not know, except for safety or
distress calls. CH No. indicates channel numbers preprogrammed to this equipment.
CH No.
---
Note
Tx (kHz)
2189.5
Rx (kHz)
2177.0
1602
16805.0
16903.0
402
4208.0
4219.5
1603
16805.5
16903.5
403
4208.5
4220.0
1604
16806.0
16904.0
404
4209.0
4220.5
1801
18898.5
19703.5
602
6312.5
6331.0
1802
18899.0
19704.0
603
6313.0
6331.5
1803
18899.5
19704.5
604
6313.5
6332.0
2201
22374.5
22444.0
Tx (kHz)
Rx (kHz)
802
8415.0
8436.5
2202
22375.0
22444.5
803
8415.5
8437.0
2203
22375.5
22445.0
804
8416.0
8437.5
2501
25208.5
26121.0
1202
12577.5
12657.0
2502
25209.0
26121.5
1203
12578.0
12657.5
2503
25209.5
26122.0
1204
12578.5
12658.0
The above frequencies can only be used when the DSC message category is
Routine.
The above table lists the sending and receiving frequencies (duplex) when a
ship station calls a coast station.
Normally routine calls between ship stations use 2177.0 kHz (simplex) as first
choice frequency.
Channels not listed in the table above (401/601/801/1201/1601) are the
frequencies listed earlier for distress and safety purposes.
In the table above, channels 402/602/802/1202/1602/1801/2201/2501 should
be selected first when making routine DSC calls on international frequencies.
ITU-R M.541-9 Annex 3 4.1.2
RR Appendix 15
RR Appendix 17 part A footnote l
11-2
CH No.
Appendix
11.4 ITU channel list (TEL/CW/TLX)
This section lists the channels preprogrammed into this equipment as TEL, CW and TLX ITU
frequencies.
(1) Radiotelephone mode (ITU-RR Appendix 17)
CH No.
Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz)
401
4065.0
402
Remarks
CH No.
Tx (kHz) Rx (kHz)
4357.0
607
6218.0
6519.0
4068.0
4360.0
608
6221.0
6522.0
403
4071.0
4363.0
609
6224.0
6224.0
Simplex
(*3)
404
4074.0
4366.0
610
6227.0
6227.0
Simplex
(*3)
405
4077.0
4369.0
611
6230.0
6230.0
Simplex
(*3)
406
4080.0
4372.0
407
4083.0
4375.0
801
8195.0
8719.0
408
4086.0
4378.0
802
8198.0
8722.0
409
4089.0
4381.0
803
8201.0
8725.0
410
4092.0
4384.0
804
8204.0
8728.0
411
4095.0
4387.0
805
8207.0
8731.0
412
4098.0
4390.0
806
8210.0
8734.0
413
4101.0
4393.0
807
8213.0
8737.0
414
4104.0
4396.0
808
8216.0
8740.0
415
4107.0
4399.0
809
8219.0
8743.0
416
4110.0
4402.0
810
8222.0
8746.0
417
4113.0
4405.0
811
8225.0
8749.0
418
4116.0
4408.0
812
8228.0
8752.0
419
4119.0
4411.0
813
8231.0
8755.0
420
4122.0
4414.0
814
8234.0
8758.0
815
8237.0
8761.0
(*1)(*2)
421
4125.0
4417.0
422
4128.0
4420.0
816
8240.0
8764.0
423
4131.0
4423.0
817
8243.0
8767.0
424
4134.0
4426.0
818
8246.0
8770.0
425
4137.0
4429.0
819
8249.0
8773.0
426
4140.0
4432.0
820
8252.0
8776.0
427
4143.0
4435.0
821
8255.0
8779.0
428
4146.0
4146.0
429
4149.0
4149.0
Simplex
(*4)
822
8258.0
8782.0
Simplex
(*5)
823
8261.0
8785.0
824
8264.0
8788.0
601
6200.0
6501.0
825
8267.0
8791.0
602
6203.0
6504.0
826
8270.0
8794.0
603
6206.0
6507.0
827
8273.0
8797.0
604
6209.0
6510.0
828
8276.0
8800.0
605
6212.0
6513.0
829
8279.0
8803.0
830
8282.0
8806.0
606
6215.0
6516.0
(*1)(*2)
Remarks
(*2)
11-3
Appendix
CH No.
Tx (kHz)
Rx (kHz)
831
8285.0
8809.0
832
8288.0
8812.0
Remarks
CH No.
Tx (kHz)
Rx (kHz)
1239
12344.0
13191.0
1240
12347.0
13194.0
1241
12350.0
13197.0
Remarks
833
8291.0
8291.0
Simplex
(*1)
834
8294.0
8294.0
Simplex
(*6)
1242
12353.0
12353.0
Simplex
(*3)
835
8297.0
8297.0
Simplex
(*7)
1243
12356.0
12356.0
Simplex
(*3)
1244
12359.0
12359.0
Simplex
(*2)
1201
12230.0
13077.0
1245
12362.0
12362.0
Simplex
(*3)
1202
12233.0
13080.0
1246
12365.0
12365.0
Simplex
(*3)
1203
12236.0
13083.0
1204
12239.0
13086.0
1601
16360.0
17242.0
1205
12242.0
13089.0
1602
16363.0
17245.0
1206
12245.0
13092.0
1603
16366.0
17248.0
1207
12248.0
13095.0
1604
16369.0
17251.0
1208
12251.0
13098.0
1605
16372.0
17254.0
1209
12254.0
13101.0
1606
16375.0
17257.0
1210
12257.0
13104.0
1607
16378.0
17260.0
1211
12260.0
13107.0
1608
16381.0
17263.0
1212
12263.0
13110.0
1609
16384.0
17266.0
1213
12266.0
13113.0
1610
16387.0
17269.0
1214
12269.0
13116.0
1611
16390.0
17272.0
1215
12272.0
13119.0
1612
16393.0
17275.0
1216
12275.0
13122.0
1613
16396.0
17278.0
1217
12278.0
13125.0
1614
16399.0
17281.0
1218
12281.0
13128.0
1615
16402.0
17284.0
1219
12284.0
13131.0
1616
16405.0
17287.0
1220
12287.0
13134.0
1617
16408.0
17290.0
1618
16411.0
17293.0
(*1) (*8)
1221
12290.0
13137.0
1222
12293.0
13140.0
1619
16414.0
17296.0
1223
12296.0
13143.0
1620
16417.0
17299.0
1224
12299.0
13146.0
1621
16420.0
17302.0
1225
12302.0
13149.0
1622
16423.0
17305.0
1226
12305.0
13152.0
1623
16426.0
17308.0
1227
12308.0
13155.0
1624
16429.0
17311.0
1228
12311.0
13158.0
1625
16432.0
17314.0
1229
12314.0
13161.0
1626
16435.0
17317.0
1230
12317.0
13164.0
1627
16438.0
17320.0
1231
12320.0
13167.0
1628
16441.0
17323.0
1232
12323.0
13170.0
1629
16444.0
17326.0
1233
12326.0
13173.0
1630
16447.0
17329.0
1234
12329.0
13176.0
1631
16450.0
17332.0
1235
12332.0
13179.0
1632
16453.0
17335.0
1236
12335.0
13182.0
1633
16456.0
17338.0
1237
12338.0
13185.0
1634
16459.0
17341.0
1238
12341.0
13188.0
1635
16462.0
17344.0
11-4
(*1) (*9)
Appendix
CH No.
Tx (kHz)
Rx (kHz)
1636
16465.0
1637
CH No.
Tx (kHz)
Rx (kHz)
Remarks
17347.0
1816
18825.0
18825.0
Simplex
(*3)
16468.0
17350.0
1817
18828.0
18828.0
Simplex
(*3)
1638
16471.0
17353.0
1818
18831.0
18831.0
Simplex
(*3)
1639
16474.0
17356.0
1819
18834.0
18834.0
Simplex
(*3)
1640
16477.0
17359.0
1820
18837.0
18837.0
Simplex
(*3)
1641
16480.0
17362.0
1821
18840.0
18840.0
Simplex
(*3)
1642
16483.0
17365.0
1822
18843.0
18843.0
Simplex
(*3)
1643
16486.0
17368.0
1644
16489.0
17371.0
2201
22000.0
22696.0
1645
16492.0
17374.0
2202
22003.0
22699.0
1646
16495.0
17377.0
2203
22006.0
22702.0
1647
16498.0
17380.0
2204
22009.0
22705.0
1648
16501.0
17383.0
2205
22012.0
22708.0
1649
16504.0
17386.0
2206
22015.0
22711.0
1650
16507.0
17389.0
2207
22018.0
22714.0
1651
16510.0
17392.0
2208
22021.0
22717.0
1652
16513.0
17395.0
2209
22024.0
22720.0
1653
16516.0
17398.0
2210
22027.0
22723.0
1654
16519.0
17401.0
2211
22030.0
22726.0
1655
16522.0
17404.0
2212
22033.0
22729.0
1656
16525.0
17407.0
1657
1658
1659
1660
1661
1662
1663
16528.0
16531.0
16534.0
16537.0
16540.0
16543.0
16546.0
16528.0
16531.0
16534.0
16537.0
16540.0
16543.0
16546.0
Remarks
2213
22036.0
22732.0
Simplex
(*3)
2214
22039.0
22735.0
Simplex
(*3)
2215
22042.0
22738.0
Simplex
(*3)
2216
22045.0
22741.0
Simplex
(*2)
2217
22048.0
22744.0
Simplex
(*3)
2218
22051.0
22747.0
Simplex
(*3)
2219
22054.0
22750.0
Simplex
(*3)
2220
22057.0
22753.0
2221
22060.0
22756.0
1801
18780.0
19755.0
2222
22063.0
22759.0
1802
18783.0
19758.0
2223
22066.0
22762.0
1803
18786.0
19761.0
2224
22069.0
22765.0
1804
18789.0
19764.0
2225
22072.0
22768.0
1805
18792.0
19767.0
2226
22075.0
22771.0
2227
22078.0
22774.0
(*2)
1806
18795.0
19770.0
1807
18798.0
19773.0
2228
22081.0
22777.0
1808
18801.0
19776.0
2229
22084.0
22780.0
1809
18804.0
19779.0
2230
22087.0
22783.0
1810
18807.0
19782.0
2231
22090.0
22786.0
1811
18810.0
19785.0
2232
22093.0
22789.0
1812
18813.0
19788.0
2233
22096.0
22792.0
1813
18816.0
19791.0
2234
22099.0
22795.0
1814
18819.0
19794.0
2235
22102.0
22798.0
1815
18822.0
19797.0
2236
22105.0
22801.0
(*2)
11-5
Appendix
CH No.
Tx (kHz)
Rx (kHz)
2237
22108.0
2238
Remarks
CH No.
Tx (kHz)
Rx (kHz)
Remarks
22804.0
2258
22171.0
22171.0
Simplex
(*3)
22111.0
22807.0
2259
22174.0
22174.0
Simplex
(*3)
2239
22114.0
22810.0
2260
22177.0
22177.0
Simplex
(*3)
2240
22117.0
22813.0
2241
22120.0
22816.0
2501
25070.0
26145.0
2242
22123.0
22819.0
2502
25073.0
26148.0
2243
22126.0
22822.0
2503
25076.0
26151.0
2244
22129.0
22825.0
2504
25079.0
26154.0
2245
22132.0
22828.0
2505
25082.0
26157.0
2246
22135.0
22831.0
2506
25085.0
26160.0
2247
22138.0
22834.0
2507
25088.0
26163.0
2248
22141.0
22837.0
2508
25091.0
26166.0
2249
22144.0
22840.0
2509
25094.0
26169.0
2250
22147.0
22843.0
2510
25097.0
26172.0
(*2)
2251
22150.0
22846.0
2511
25100.0
25100.0
Simplex
(*3)
2252
22153.0
22849.0
2512
25103.0
25103.0
Simplex
(*3)
2253
22156.0
22852.0
2513
25106.0
25106.0
Simplex
(*3)
2254
22159.0
22159.0
Simplex
(*3)
2514
25109.0
25109.0
Simplex
(*3)
2255
22162.0
22162.0
Simplex
(*3)
2515
25112.0
25112.0
Simplex
(*3)
2256
22165.0
22165.0
Simplex
(*3)
2516
25115.0
25115.0
Simplex
(*3)
2257
22168.0
22168.0
Simplex
(*3)
2517
25118.0
25118.0
Simplex
(*3)
*1) Used for distress and safety purposes (operates duplex channel as simplex).
*2) For calling.
*3) For inter-ship communications.
*4) For inter-ship communications. You can also communicate with coast stations on Rx 4351.0 kHz.
*5) For inter-ship communications. You can also communicate with coast stations on Rx 4354.0 kHz.
*6) For inter-ship communications. You can also communicate with coast stations on Rx 8707.0 kHz.
*7) For inter-ship communications. You can also communicate with coast stations on Rx 8710.0 kHz.
*8) From January 2004, calling on channel 1221 is prohibited.
*9) From January 2004, calling on channel 1621 is prohibited.
11-6
Appendix
(2) Additional usable frequencies in TEL mode (ITU-RR Appendix 17 / Sub Section C-1/ C-2)
Tx (kHz)
Rx (kHz)
Remarks
Tx (kHz)
Rx (kHz)
Remarks
4000.0
4000.0
Simplex
8116.0
81160.
Simplex
4003.0
4003.0
Simplex
8119.0
8119.0
Simplex
4006.0
4006.0
Simplex
8122.0
8122.0
Simplex
4009.0
4009.0
Simplex
8125.0
8125.0
Simplex
4012.0
4012.0
Simplex
8128.0
8128.0
Simplex
4015.0
4015.0
Simplex
8131.0
8131.0
Simplex
4018.0
4018.0
Simplex
8134.0
8134.0
Simplex
4021.0
4021.0
Simplex
8137.0
8137.0
Simplex
4024.0
4024.0
Simplex
8140.0
8140.0
Simplex
4027.0
4027.0
Simplex
8143.0
8143.0
Simplex
4030.0
4030.0
Simplex
8146.0
8146.0
Simplex
4033.0
4033.0
Simplex
8149.0
8149.0
Simplex
4036.0
4036.0
Simplex
8152.0
8152.0
Simplex
4039.0
4039.0
Simplex
8155.0
8155.0
Simplex
4042.0
4042.0
Simplex
8158.0
8158.0
Simplex
4045.0
4045.0
Simplex
8161.0
8161.0
Simplex
4048.0
4048.0
Simplex
8164.0
8164.0
Simplex
4051.0
4051.0
Simplex
8167.0
8167.0
Simplex
4054.0
4054.0
Simplex
8170.0
8170.0
Simplex
4057.0
4057.0
Simplex
8173.0
8173.0
Simplex
4060.0
4060.0
Simplex
8176.0
8176.0
Simplex
8179.0
8179.0
Simplex
8101.0
8101.0
Simplex
8182.0
8182.0
Simplex
8104.0
8104.0
Simplex
8185.0
8185.0
Simplex
8107.0
8107.0
Simplex
8188.0
8188.0
Simplex
8110.0
8110.0
Simplex
8191.0
8191.0
Simplex
8113.0
8113.0
Simplex
11-7
Appendix
(3) CW mode (ITU-RR Appendix 17)
CH No.
TRx (kHz) Remarks
CH No.
TRx (kHz) Remarks
CH No.
TRx (kHz) Remarks
401
4182.0
Calling
605
6278.0
Calling
809
8370.0
Calling
402
4182.5
Calling
606
6278.5
Calling
810
8370.5
Calling
403
4184.0
Calling
607
6279.0
Calling
811
8342.0
404
4184.5
Calling
608
6279.5
Calling
812
8342.5
405
4183.0
Calling
609
6280.0
Calling
813
8343.0
406
4183.5
Calling
610
6280.5
Calling
814
8343.5
407
4185.0
Calling
611
6285.0
815
8344.0
408
4185.5
Calling
612
6285.5
816
8344.5
409
4186.0
Calling
613
6286.0
817
8345.0
410
4186.5
614
6286.5
818
8345.5
411
4187.0
615
6287.0
819
8346.0
412
4187.5
616
6287.5
820
8346.5
413
4188.0
617
6288.0
821
8347.0
414
4188.5
618
6288.5
822
8347.5
415
4189.0
619
6289.0
823
8348.0
416
4189.5
620
6289.5
824
8348.5
417
4190.0
621
6290.0
825
8349.0
418
4190.5
622
6290.5
826
8349.5
419
4191.0
623
6291.0
827
8350.0
420
4191.5
624
6291.5
828
8350.5
421
4192.0
625
6292.0
829
8351.0
422
4192.5
626
6292.5
830
8351.5
423
4193.0
627
6293.0
831
8352.0
424
4193.5
628
6293.5
832
8352.5
425
4194.0
629
6294.0
833
8353.0
426
4194.5
630
6294.5
834
8353.5
427
4195.0
631
6295.0
835
8354.0
428
4195.5
632
6295.5
836
8354.5
429
4196.0
633
6296.0
837
8355.0
430
4196.5
634
6296.5
838
8355.5
431
4197.0
635
6297.0
839
8356.0
432
4197.5
636
6297.5
840
8356.5
433
4198.0
637
6298.0
841
8357.0
434
4198.5
638
6298.5
842
8357.5
435
4199.0
639
6299.0
843
8358.0
436
4199.5
640
6299.5
844
8358.5
437
4200.0
641
6300.0
845
8359.0
438
4200.5
846
8359.5
439
4201.0
801
8366.0
Calling
847
8360.0
440
4201.5
802
8366.5
Calling
848
8360.5
441
4202.0
803
8368.0
Calling
849
8361.0
804
8369.0
Calling
850
8361.5
601
6277.0
Calling
805
8367.0
Calling
851
8362.0
602
6277.5
Calling
806
8367.5
Calling
852
8362.5
603
6276.0
Calling
807
8368.5
Calling
853
8363.0
604
6276.5
Calling
808
8369.5
Calling
854
8363.5
11-8
Appendix
CH No.
TRx (kHz) Remarks
CH No.
TRx (kHz) Remarks
CH No.
TRx (kHz) Remarks
855
8364.0
1232
12432.5
1279
12456.0
856
8364.5
1233
12433.0
1280
12456.5
857
8365.0
1234
12433.5
1281
12457.0
858
8365.5
1235
12434.0
1282
12457.5
859
8371.0
1236
12434.5
1283
12458.0
860
8371.5
1237
12435.0
1284
12458.5
861
8372.0
1238
12435.5
1285
12459.0
862
8372.5
1239
12436.0
1286
12459.5
863
8373.0
1240
12436.5
1287
12460.0
864
8373.5
1241
12437.0
1288
12460.5
865
8374.0
1242
12437.5
1289
12461.0
866
8374.5
1243
12438.0
1290
12461.5
867
8375.0
1244
12438.5
1291
12462.0
868
8375.5
1245
12439.0
1292
12462.5
869
8376.0
1246
12439.5
1293
12463.0
1247
12440.0
1294
12463.5
1201
12550.0
Calling
1248
12440.5
1295
12464.0
1202
12550.5
Calling
1249
12441.0
1296
12464.5
1203
12552.0
Calling
1250
12441.5
1297
12465.0
1204
12553.5
Calling
1251
12442.0
1298
12465.5
1205
12551.0
Calling
1252
12442.5
1299
12466.0
1206
12551.5
Calling
1253
12443.0
12100
12466.5
1207
12552.5
Calling
1254
12443.5
12101
12467.0
1208
12553.0
Calling
1255
12444.0
12102
12467.5
1209
12554.0
Calling
1256
12444.5
12103
12468.0
1210
12554.5
Calling
1257
12445.0
12104
12468.5
1211
12422.0
1258
12445.5
12105
12469.0
1212
12422.5
1259
12446.0
12106
12469.5
1213
12423.0
1260
12446.5
12107
12470.0
1214
12423.5
1261
12447.0
12108
12470.5
1215
12424.0
1262
12447.5
12109
12471.0
1216
12424.5
1263
12448.0
12110
12471.5
1217
12425.0
1264
12448.5
12111
12472.0
1218
12425.5
1265
12449.0
12112
12472.5
1219
12426.0
1266
12449.5
12113
12473.0
1220
12426.5
1267
12450.0
12114
12473.5
1221
12427.0
1268
12450.5
12115
12474.0
1222
12427.5
1269
12451.0
12116
12474.5
1223
12428.0
1270
12451.5
12117
12475.0
1224
12428.5
1271
12452.0
12118
12475.5
1225
12429.0
1272
12452.5
12119
12476.0
1226
12429.5
1273
12453.0
12120
12476.5
1227
12430.0
1274
12453.5
1228
12430.5
1275
12454.0
1601
16734.0
Calling
1229
12431.0
1276
12454.5
1602
16734.5
Calling
1230
12431.5
1277
12455.0
1603
16736.0
Calling
1231
12432.0
1278
12455.5
1604
16738.0
Calling
11-9
Appendix
CH No.
TRx (kHz) Remarks
CH No.
TRx (kHz) Remarks
CH No.
TRx (kHz) Remarks
1605
16735.0
Calling
1652
16639.5
1699
16663.0
1606
16735.5
Calling
1653
16640.0
16100
16663.5
1607
16736.5
Calling
1654
16640.5
16101
16664.0
1608
16737.0
Calling
1655
16641.0
16102
16664.5
1609
16737.5
Calling
1656
16641.5
16103
16665.0
1610
16738.5
Calling
1657
16642.0
16104
16665.5
1611
16619.0
1658
16642.5
16105
16666.0
1612
16619.5
1659
16643.0
16106
16666.5
1613
16620.0
1660
16643.5
16107
16667.0
1614
16620.5
1661
16644.0
16108
16667.5
1615
16621.0
1662
16644.5
16109
16668.0
1616
16621.5
1663
16645.0
16110
16668.5
1617
16622.0
1664
16645.5
16111
16669.0
1618
16622.5
1665
16646.0
16112
16669.5
1619
16623.0
1666
16646.5
16113
16670.0
1620
16623.5
1667
16647.0
16114
16670.5
1621
16624.0
1668
16647.5
16115
16671.0
1622
16624.5
1669
16648.0
16116
16671.5
1623
16625.0
1670
16648.5
16117
16672.0
1624
16625.5
1671
16649.0
16118
16672.5
1625
16626.0
1672
16649.5
16119
16673.0
1626
16626.5
1673
16650.0
16120
16673.5
1627
16627.0
1674
16650.5
16121
16674.0
1628
16627.5
1675
16651.0
16122
16674.5
1629
16628.0
1676
16651.5
16123
16675.0
1630
16628.5
1677
16652.0
16124
16675.5
1631
16629.0
1678
16652.5
16125
16676.0
1632
16629.5
1679
16653.0
16126
16676.5
1633
16630.0
1680
16653.5
16127
16677.0
1634
16630.5
1681
16654.0
16128
16677.5
1635
16631.0
1682
16654.5
16129
16678.0
1636
16631.5
1683
16655.0
16130
16678.5
1637
16632.0
1684
16655.5
16131
16679.0
1638
16632.5
1685
16656.0
16132
16679.5
1639
16633.0
1686
16656.5
16133
16680.0
1640
16633.5
1687
16657.0
16134
16680.5
1641
16634.0
1688
16657.5
16135
16681.0
1642
16634.5
1689
16658.0
16136
16681.5
1643
16635.0
1690
16658.5
16137
16682.0
1644
16635.5
1691
16659.0
16138
16682.5
1645
16636.0
1692
16659.5
16139
16683.0
1646
16636.5
1693
16660.0
1647
16637.0
1694
16660.5
2201
22279.5
Calling
1648
16637.5
1695
16661.0
2202
22280.0
Calling
1649
16638.0
1696
16661.5
2203
22280.5
Calling
1650
16638.5
1697
16662.0
2204
22281.0
Calling
1651
16639.0
1698
16662.5
2205
22281.5
Calling
11-10
Appendix
CH No.
TRx (kHz) Remarks
CH No.
TRx (kHz) Remarks
CH No.
TRx (kHz) Remarks
2206
22282.0
Calling
2241
22257.0
2276
22274.5
2207
22282.5
Calling
2242
22257.5
2277
22275.0
2208
22283.0
Calling
2243
22258.0
2278
22275.5
2209
22283.5
Calling
2244
22258.5
2279
22276.0
2210
22284.0
Calling
2245
22259.0
2280
22276.5
2211
22242.0
2246
22259.5
2281
22277.0
2212
22242.5
2247
22260.0
2282
22277.5
2213
22243.0
2248
22260.5
2283
22278.0
2214
22243.5
2249
22261.0
2284
22278.5
2215
22244.0
2250
22261.5
2285
22279.0
2216
22244.5
2251
22262.0
2217
22245.0
2252
22262.5
2501
25171.5
Calling
2218
22245.5
2253
22263.0
2502
25172.0
Calling
2219
22246.0
2254
22263.5
2503
25171.5
Calling
2220
22246.5
2255
22264.0
2504
25172.5
Calling
2221
22247.0
2256
22264.5
2505
25161.5
2222
22247.5
2257
22265.0
2506
25162.0
2223
22248.0
2258
22265.5
2507
25162.5
2224
22248.5
2259
22266.0
2508
25163.0
2225
22249.0
2260
22266.5
2509
25163.5
2226
22249.5
2261
22267.0
2510
25164.0
2227
22250.0
2262
22267.5
2511
25164.5
2228
22250.5
2263
22268.0
2512
25165.0
2229
22251.0
2264
22268.5
2513
25165.5
2230
22251.5
2265
22269.0
2514
25166.0
2231
22252.0
2266
22269.5
2515
25166.5
2232
22252.5
2267
22270.0
2516
25167.0
2233
22253.0
2268
22270.5
2517
25167.5
2234
22253.5
2269
22271.0
2518
25168.0
2235
22254.0
2270
22271.5
2519
25168.5
2236
22254.5
2271
22272.0
2520
25169.0
2237
22255.0
2272
22272.5
2521
25169.5
2238
22255.5
2273
22273.0
2522
25170.0
2239
22256.0
2274
22273.5
2523
25170.5
2240
22256.5
2275
22274.0
2524
25171.0
11-11
Appendix
(4)
Telex mode（ ITU-RR Appendix 17）
CH No.
Tx（ kHz） Rx（ kHz） Remarks
CH No.
Tx（ kHz） Rx（ kHz） Remarks
401
4172.5
4210.5
614
6269.5
6320.5
402
4173.0
4211.0
615
6270.0
6321.0
403
4173.5
4211.5
616
6270.5
6321.5
404
4174.0
4212.0
617
6271.0
6322.0
405
4174.5
4212.5
618
6271.5
6322.5
406
4175.0
4213.0
619
6272.0
6323.0
407
4175.5
4213.5
620
6272.5
6323.5
408
4176.0
4214.0
621
6273.0
6324.0
409
4176.5
4214.5
622
6273.5
6324.5
410
4177.0
4215.0
623
6274.0
6325.0
624
6274.5
6325.5
Simplex
(*1)
411
4177.5
4177.5
412
4178.0
4215.5
625
6275.0
6326.0
413
4178.5
4216.0
626
6275.5
6326.5
414
4179.0
4216.5
627
6281.0
6327.0
415
4179.5
4217.0
628
6281.5
6327.5
416
4180.0
4217.5
629
6282.0
6328.0
417
4180.5
4218.0
630
6282.5
6328.5
418
4181.0
4218.5
631
6283.0
6329.0
419
4181.5
4219.0
632
6283.5
6329.5
420
4202.5
4202.5
Simplex
633
6284.0
6330.0
421
4203.0
4203.0
Simplex
634
6284.5
6330.5
422
4203.5
4203.5
Simplex
635
6300.5
6300.5
Simplex
423
4204.0
4204.0
Simplex
636
6301.0
6301.0
Simplex
424
4204.5
4204.5
Simplex
637
6301.5
6301.5
Simplex
425
4205.0
4205.0
Simplex
638
6302.0
6302.0
Simplex
426
4205.5
4205.5
Simplex
639
6302.5
6302.5
Simplex
427
4206.0
4206.0
Simplex
640
6303.0
6303.0
Simplex
428
4206.5
4206.5
Simplex
641
6303.5
6303.5
Simplex
429
4207.0
4207.0
Simplex
642
6304.0
6304.0
Simplex
643
6304.5
6304.5
Simplex
601
6263.0
6314.5
644
6305.0
6305.0
Simplex
602
6263.5
6315.0
645
6305.5
6305.5
Simplex
603
6264.0
6315.5
646
6306.0
6306.0
Simplex
604
6264.5
6316.0
647
6306.5
6306.5
Simplex
605
6265.0
6316.5
648
6307.0
6307.0
Simplex
606
6265.5
6317.0
649
6307.5
6307.5
Simplex
607
6266.0
6317.5
650
6308.0
6308.0
Simplex
608
6266.5
6318.0
651
6308.5
6308.5
Simplex
609
6267.0
6318.5
652
6309.0
6309.0
Simplex
610
6267.5
6319.0
653
6309.5
6309.5
Simplex
654
6310.0
6310.0
Simplex
611
6268.0
6268.0
612
6268.5
6319.5
655
6310.5
6310.5
Simplex
613
6269.0
6320.0
656
6311.0
6311.0
Simplex
11-12
Simplex
(*1)
Appendix
CH No.
Tx（ kHz） Rx（ kHz） Remarks
CH No.
Tx（ kHz） Rx（ kHz） Remarks
657
6311.5
843
8397.5
8397.5
Simplex
844
8398.0
8398.0
Simplex
845
8398.5
8398.5
Simplex
6311.5
Simplex
Simplex
(*1)
801
8376.5
8376.5
802
8377.0
8417.0
846
8399.0
8399.0
Simplex
803
8377.5
8417.5
847
8399.5
8399.5
Simplex
804
8378.0
8418.0
848
8400.0
8400.0
Simplex
805
8378.5
8418.5
849
8400.5
8400.5
Simplex
806
8379.0
8419.0
850
8401.0
8401.0
Simplex
807
8379.5
8419.5
851
8401.5
8401.5
Simplex
808
8380.0
8420.0
852
8402.0
8402.0
Simplex
809
8380.5
8420.5
853
8402.5
8402.5
Simplex
810
8381.0
8421.0
854
8403.0
8403.0
Simplex
811
8381.5
8421.5
855
8403.5
8403.5
Simplex
812
8382.0
8422.0
856
8404.0
8404.0
Simplex
813
8382.5
8422.5
857
8404.5
8404.5
Simplex
814
8383.0
8423.0
858
8405.0
8405.0
Simplex
815
8383.5
8423.5
859
8405.5
8405.5
Simplex
816
8384.0
8424.0
860
8406.0
8406.0
Simplex
817
8384.5
8424.5
861
8406.5
8406.5
Simplex
818
8385.0
8425.0
862
8407.0
8407.0
Simplex
819
8385.5
8425.5
863
8407.5
8407.5
Simplex
820
8386.0
8426.0
864
8408.0
8408.0
Simplex
821
8386.5
8426.5
865
8408.5
8408.5
Simplex
822
8387.0
8427.0
866
8409.0
8409.0
Simplex
823
8387.5
8427.5
867
8409.5
8409.5
Simplex
824
8388.0
8428.0
868
8410.0
8410.0
Simplex
825
8388.5
8428.5
869
8410.5
8410.5
Simplex
826
8389.0
8429.0
870
8411.0
8411.0
Simplex
827
8389.5
8429.5
871
8411.5
8411.5
Simplex
828
8390.0
8430.0
872
8412.0
8412.0
Simplex
829
8390.5
8430.5
873
8412.5
8412.5
Simplex
830
8391.0
8431.0
874
8413.0
8413.0
Simplex
831
8391.5
8431.5
875
8413.5
8413.5
Simplex
832
8392.0
8432.0
876
8414.0
8414.0
Simplex
833
8392.5
8432.5
834
8393.0
8433.0
1201
12477.0
12579.5
835
8393.5
8433.5
1202
12477.5
12580.0
836
8394.0
8434.0
1203
12478.0
12580.5
837
8394.5
8434.5
1204
12478.5
12581.0
838
8395.0
8435.0
1205
12479.0
12581.5
839
8395.5
8435.5
1206
12479.5
12582.0
840
8396.0
8436.0
1207
12480.0
12582.5
841
8396.5
8396.5
Simplex
1208
12480.5
12583.0
842
8397.0
8397.0
Simplex
1209
12481.0
12583.5
11-13
Appendix
CH No.
Tx（ kHz） Rx（ kHz） Remarks
CH No.
Tx（ kHz） Rx（ kHz） Remarks
1210
12481.5
12584.0
1254
12503.5
12606.0
1211
12482.0
12584.5
1255
12504.0
12606.5
1212
12482.5
12585.0
1256
12504.5
12607.0
1213
12483.0
12585.5
1257
12505.0
12607.5
1214
12483.5
12586.0
1258
12505.5
12608.0
1215
12484.0
12586.5
1259
12506.0
12608.5
1216
12484.5
12587.0
1260
12506.5
12609.0
1217
12485.0
12587.5
1261
12507.0
12609.5
1218
12485.5
12588.0
1262
12507.5
12610.0
1219
12486.0
12588.5
1263
12508.0
12610.5
1220
12486.5
12589.0
1264
12508.5
12611.0
1221
12487.0
12589.5
1265
12509.0
12611.5
1222
12487.5
12590.0
1266
12509.5
12612.0
1223
12488.0
12590.5
1267
12510.0
12612.5
1224
12488.5
12591.0
1268
12510.5
12613.0
1225
12489.0
12591.5
1269
12511.0
12613.5
1226
12489.5
12592.0
1270
12511.5
12614.0
1227
12490.0
12592.5
1271
12512.0
12614.5
1228
12490.5
12593.0
1272
12512.5
12615.0
1229
12491.0
12593.5
1273
12513.0
12615.5
1230
12491.5
12594.0
1274
12513.5
12616.0
1231
12492.0
12594.5
1275
12514.0
12616.5
1232
12492.5
12595.0
1276
12514.5
12617.0
1233
12493.0
12595.5
1277
12515.0
12617.5
1234
12493.5
12596.0
1278
12515.5
12618.0
1235
12494.0
12596.5
1279
12516.0
12618.5
1236
12494.5
12597.0
1280
12516.5
12619.0
1237
12495.0
12597.5
1281
12517.0
12619.5
1238
12495.5
12598.0
1282
12517.5
12620.0
1239
12496.0
12598.5
1283
12518.0
12620.5
1240
12496.5
12599.0
1284
12518.5
12621.0
1241
12497.0
12599.5
1285
12519.0
12621.5
1242
12497.5
12600.0
1286
12519.5
12622.0
1243
12498.0
12600.5
1287
12520.0
12520.0
1244
12498.5
12601.0
1288
12520.5
12622.5
1245
12499.0
12601.5
1289
12521.0
12623.0
1246
12499.5
12602.0
1290
12521.5
12623.5
1247
12500.0
12602.5
1291
12522.0
12624.0
1248
12500.5
12603.0
1292
12522.5
12624.5
1249
12501.0
12603.5
1293
12523.0
12625.0
1250
12501.5
12604.0
1294
12523.5
12625.5
1251
12502.0
12604.5
1295
12524.0
12626.0
1252
12502.5
12605.0
1296
12524.5
12626.5
1253
12503.0
12605.5
1297
12525.0
12627.0
11-14
Simplex
(*1)
Appendix
CH No.
Tx（ kHz） Rx（ kHz） Remarks
CH No.
Tx（ kHz） Rx（ kHz） Remarks
1298
12525.5
12627.5
12142
12547.5
12649.5
1299
12526.0
12628.0
12143
12548.0
12650.0
12100
12526.5
12628.5
12144
12548.5
12650.5
12101
12527.0
12629.0
12145
12549.0
12651.0
12102
12527.5
12629.5
12146
12549.5
12651.5
12103
12528.0
12630.0
12147
12555.0
12652.0
12104
12528.5
12630.5
12148
12555.5
12652.5
12105
12529.0
12631.0
12149
12556.0
12653.0
12106
12529.5
12631.5
12150
12556.5
12653.5
12107
12530.0
12632.0
12151
12557.0
12654.0
12108
12530.5
12632.5
12152
12557.5
12654.5
12109
12531.0
12633.0
12153
12558.0
12655.0
12110
12531.5
12633.5
12154
12558.5
12655.5
12111
12532.0
12634.0
12155
12559.0
12656.0
12112
12532.5
12634.5
12156
12559.5
12656.5
12113
12533.0
12635.0
12157
12560.0
12560.0
Simplex
12114
12533.5
12635.5
12158
12560.5
12560.5
Simplex
12115
12534.0
12636.0
12159
12561.0
12561.0
Simplex
12116
12534.5
12636.5
12160
21561.5
12561.5
Simplex
12117
12535.0
12637.0
12161
12562.0
12562.0
Simplex
12118
12535.5
12637.5
12162
12562.5
12562.5
Simplex
12119
12536.0
12638.0
12163
12563.0
12563.0
Simplex
12120
12536.5
12638.5
12164
12563.5
12563.5
Simplex
12121
12537.0
12639.0
12165
12564.0
12564.0
Simplex
12122
12537.5
12639.5
12166
12564.5
12564.5
Simplex
12123
12538.0
12640.0
12167
12565.0
12565.0
Simplex
12124
12538.5
12640.5
12168
12565.5
12565.5
Simplex
12125
12539.0
12641.0
12169
12566.0
12566.0
Simplex
12126
12539.5
12641.5
12170
12566.5
12566.5
Simplex
12127
12540.0
12642.0
12171
12567.0
12567.0
Simplex
12128
12540.5
12642.5
12172
12567.5
12567.5
Simplex
12129
21541.0
12643.0
12173
12568.0
12568.0
Simplex
12130
12541.5
12643.5
12174
12568.5
12568.5
Simplex
12131
12542.0
12644.0
12175
12569.0
12569.0
Simplex
12132
12542.5
12644.5
12176
12569.5
12569.5
Simplex
12133
12543.0
12645.0
12177
12570.0
12570.0
Simplex
12134
12543.5
12645.5
12178
12570.5
12570.5
Simplex
12135
12544.0
12646.0
12179
12571.0
12571.0
Simplex
12136
12544.5
12646.5
12180
12571.5
12571.5
Simplex
12137
12545.0
12647.0
12181
12572.0
12572.0
Simplex
12138
12545.5
12647.5
12182
12572.5
12572.5
Simplex
12139
12546.0
12648.0
12183
12573.0
12573.0
Simplex
12140
12546.5
12648.5
12184
12573.5
12573.5
Simplex
12141
12547.0
12649.0
12185
12574.0
12574.0
Simplex
11-15
Appendix
CH No.
Tx（ kHz） Rx（ kHz） Remarks
CH No.
Tx（ kHz） Rx（ kHz） Remarks
12186
12574.5
12574.5
Simplex
1639
16702.5
16825.5
12187
12575.0
12575.0
Simplex
1640
16703.0
16826.0
12188
12575.5
12575.5
Simplex
1641
16703.5
16826.5
12189
12576.0
12576.0
Simplex
1642
16704.0
16827.0
12190
12576.5
12576.5
Simplex
1643
16704.5
16827.5
1644
16705.0
16828.0
1601
16683.5
16807.0
1645
16705.5
16828.5
1602
16684.0
16807.5
1646
16706.0
16829.0
1603
16684.5
16808.0
1647
16706.5
16829.5
1604
16685.0
16808.5
1648
16707.0
16830.0
1605
16685.5
16809.0
1649
16707.5
16830.5
1606
16686.0
16809.5
1650
16708.0
16831.0
1607
16686.5
16810.0
1651
16708.5
16831.5
1608
16687.0
16810.5
1652
16709.0
16832.0
1609
16687.5
16811.0
1653
16709.5
16832.5
1610
16688.0
16811.5
1654
16710.0
16833.0
1611
16688.5
16812.0
1655
16710.5
16833.5
1612
16689.0
16812.5
1656
16711.0
16834.0
1613
16689.5
16813.0
1657
16711.5
16834.5
1614
16690.0
16813.5
1658
16712.0
16835.0
1615
16690.5
16814.0
1659
16712.5
16835.5
1616
16691.0
16814.5
1660
16713.0
16836.0
1617
16691.5
16815.0
1661
16713.5
16836.5
1618
16692.0
16815.5
1662
16714.0
16837.0
1619
16692.5
16816.0
1663
16714.5
16837.5
1620
16693.0
16816.5
1664
16715.0
16838.0
1621
16693.5
16817.0
1665
16715.5
16838.5
1622
16694.0
16817.5
1666
16716.0
16839.0
1623
16694.5
16818.0
1667
16716.5
16839.5
1624
16695.0
16695.0
1668
16717.0
16840.0
1625
16695.5
16818.5
1669
16717.5
16840.5
1626
16696.0
16819.0
1670
16718.0
16841.0
1627
16696.5
16819.5
1671
16718.5
16841.5
1628
16697.0
16820.0
1672
16719.0
16842.0
1629
16697.5
16820.5
1673
16719.5
16842.5
1630
16698.0
16821.0
1674
16720.0
16843.0
1631
16698.5
16821.5
1675
16720.5
16843.5
1632
16699.0
16822.0
1676
16721.0
16844.0
1633
16699.5
16822.5
1677
16721.5
16844.5
1634
16700.0
16823.0
1678
16722.0
16845.0
1635
16700.5
16823.5
1679
16722.5
16845.5
1636
16701.0
16824.0
1680
16723.0
16846.0
1637
16701.5
16824.5
1681
16723.5
16846.5
1638
16702.0
16825.0
1682
16724.0
16847.0
11-16
Simplex
(*1)
Appendix
CH No.
Tx（ kHz） Rx（ kHz） Remarks
CH No.
Tx（ kHz） Rx（ kHz） Remarks
1683
16724.5
16847.5
16127
16751.5
16869.5
1684
16725.0
16848.0
16128
16752.0
16870.0
1685
16725.5
16848.5
16129
16752.5
16870.5
1686
16726.0
16849.0
16130
16753.0
16871.0
1687
16726.5
16849.5
16131
16753.5
16871.5
1688
16727.0
16850.0
16132
16754.0
16872.0
1689
16727.5
16850.5
16133
16754.5
16872.5
1690
16728.0
16851.0
16134
16755.0
16873.0
1691
16728.5
16851.5
16135
16755.5
16873.5
1692
16729.0
16852.0
16136
16756.0
16874.0
1693
16729.5
16852.5
16137
16756.5
16874.5
1694
16730.0
16853.0
16138
16757.0
16875.0
1695
16730.5
16853.5
16139
16757.5
16875.5
1696
16731.0
16854.0
16140
16758.0
16876.0
1697
16731.5
16854.5
16141
16758.5
16876.5
1698
16732.0
16855.0
16142
16759.0
16877.0
1699
16732.5
16855.5
16143
16759.5
16877.5
16100
16733.0
16856.0
16144
16760.0
16878.0
16101
16733.5
16856.5
16145
16760.5
16878.5
16102
16739.0
16857.0
16146
16761.0
16879.0
16103
16739.5
16857.5
16147
16761.5
16879.5
16104
16740.0
16858.0
16148
16762.0
16880.0
16105
16740.5
16858.5
16149
16762.5
16880.5
16106
16741.0
16859.0
16150
16763.0
16881.0
16107
16741.5
16859.5
16151
16763.5
16881.5
16108
16742.0
16860.0
16152
16764.0
16882.0
16109
16742.5
16860.5
16153
16764.5
16882.5
16110
16743.0
16861.0
16154
16765.0
16883.0
16111
16743.5
16861.5
16155
16765.5
16883.5
16112
16744.0
16862.0
16156
16766.0
16884.0
16113
16744.5
16862.5
16157
16766.5
16884.5
16114
16745.0
16863.0
16158
16767.0
16885.0
16115
16745.5
16863.5
16159
16767.5
16885.5
16116
16746.0
16864.0
16160
16768.0
16886.0
16117
16746.5
16864.5
16161
16768.5
16886.5
16118
16747.0
16865.0
16162
16769.0
16887.0
16119
16747.5
16865.5
16163
16769.5
16887.5
16120
16748.0
16866.0
16164
16770.0
16888.0
16121
16748.5
16866.5
16165
16770.5
16888.5
16122
16749.0
16867.0
16166
16771.0
16889.0
16123
16749.5
16867.5
16167
16771.5
16889.5
16124
16750.0
16868.0
16168
16772.0
16890.0
16125
16750.5
16868.5
16169
16772.5
16890.5
16126
16751.0
16869.0
16170
16773.0
16891.0
11-17
Appendix
CH No.
Tx（ kHz） Rx（ kHz） Remarks
CH No.
Tx（ kHz） Rx（ kHz） Remarks
16171
16773.5
16891.5
16215
16795.5
16795.5
Simplex
16172
16774.0
16892.0
16216
16796.0
16796.0
Simplex
16173
16774.5
16892.5
16217
16796.5
16796.5
Simplex
16174
16775.0
16893.0
16218
16797.0
16797.0
Simplex
16175
16775.5
16893.5
16219
16797.5
16797.5
Simplex
16176
16776.0
16894.0
16220
16798.0
16798.0
Simplex
16177
16776.5
16894.5
16221
16798.5
16798.5
Simplex
16178
16777.0
16895.0
16222
16799.0
16799.0
Simplex
16179
16777.5
16895.5
16223
16799.5
16799.5
Simplex
16180
16778.0
16896.0
16224
16800.0
16800.0
Simplex
16181
16778.5
16896.5
16225
16800.5
16800.5
Simplex
16182
16779.0
16897.0
16226
16801.0
16801.0
Simplex
16183
16779.5
16897.5
16227
16801.5
16801.5
Simplex
16184
16780.0
16898.0
16228
16802.0
16802.0
Simplex
16185
16780.5
16898.5
16229
16802.5
16802.5
Simplex
16186
16781.0
16899.0
16230
16803.0
16803.0
Simplex
16187
16781.5
16899.5
16231
16803.5
16803.5
Simplex
16188
16782.0
16900.0
16232
16804.0
16804.0
Simplex
16189
16782.5
16900.5
16190
16783.0
16901.0
1801
18870.5
19681.0
16191
16783.5
16901.5
1802
18871.0
19681.5
16192
16784.0
16902.0
1803
18871.5
19682.0
16193
16784.5
16902.5
1804
18872.0
19682.5
16194
16785.0
16785.0
Simplex
1805
18872.5
19683.0
16195
16785.5
16785.5
Simplex
1806
18873.0
19683.5
16196
16786.0
16786.0
Simplex
1807
18873.5
19684.0
16197
16786.5
16786.5
Simplex
1808
18874.0
19684.5
16198
16787.0
16787.0
Simplex
1809
18874.5
19685.0
16199
16787.5
16787.5
Simplex
1810
18875.0
19685.5
16200
16788.0
16788.0
Simplex
1811
18875.5
19686.0
16201
16788.5
16788.5
Simplex
1812
18876.0
19686.5
16202
16789.0
16789.0
Simplex
1813
18876.5
19687.0
16203
16789.5
16789.5
Simplex
1814
18877.0
19687.5
16204
16790.0
16790.0
Simplex
1815
18877.5
19688.0
16205
16790.5
16790.5
Simplex
1816
18878.0
19688.5
16206
16791.0
16791.0
Simplex
1817
18878.5
19689.0
16207
16791.5
16791.5
Simplex
1818
18879.0
19689.5
16208
16792.0
16792.0
Simplex
1819
18879.5
19690.0
16209
16792.5
16792.5
Simplex
1820
18880.0
19690.5
16210
16793.0
16793.0
Simplex
1821
18880.5
19691.0
16211
16793.5
16793.5
Simplex
1822
18881.0
19691.5
16212
16794.0
16794.0
Simplex
1823
18881.5
19692.0
16213
16794.5
16794.5
Simplex
1824
18882.0
19692.5
16214
16795.0
16795.0
Simplex
1825
18882.5
19693.0
11-18
Appendix
CH No.
Tx（ kHz） Rx（ kHz） Remarks
CH No.
Tx（ kHz） Rx（ kHz） Remarks
1826
18883.0
19693.5
2213
22290.5
22382.5
1827
18883.5
19694.0
2214
22291.0
22383.0
1828
18884.0
19694.5
2215
22291.5
22383.5
1829
18884.5
19695.0
2216
22292.0
22384.0
1830
18885.0
19695.5
2217
22292.5
22384.5
1831
18885.5
19696.0
2218
22293.0
22385.0
1832
18886.0
19696.5
2219
22293.5
22385.5
1833
18886.5
19697.0
2220
22294.0
22386.0
1834
18887.0
19697.5
2221
22294.5
22386.5
1835
18887.5
19698.0
2222
22295.0
22387.0
1836
18888.0
19698.5
2223
22295.5
22387.5
1837
18888.5
19699.0
2224
22296.0
22388.0
1838
18889.0
19699.5
2225
22296.5
22388.5
1839
18889.5
19700.0
2226
22297.0
22389.0
1840
18890.0
19700.5
2227
22297.5
22389.5
1841
18890.5
19701.0
2228
22298.0
22390.0
1842
18891.0
19701.5
2229
22298.5
22390.5
1843
18891.5
19702.0
2230
22299.0
22391.0
1844
18892.0
19702.5
2231
22299.5
22391.5
1845
18892.5
19703.0
2232
22300.0
22392.0
1846
18893.0
18893.0
Simplex
2233
22300.5
22392.5
1847
18893.5
18893.5
Simplex
2234
22301.0
22393.0
1848
18894.0
18894.0
Simplex
2235
22301.5
22393.5
1849
18894.5
18894.5
Simplex
2236
22302.0
22394.0
1850
18895.0
18895.0
Simplex
2237
22302.5
22394.5
1851
18895.5
18895.5
Simplex
2238
22303.0
22395.0
1852
18896.0
18896.0
Simplex
2239
22303.5
22395.5
1853
18896.5
18896.5
Simplex
2240
22304.0
22396.0
1854
18897.0
18897.0
Simplex
2241
22304.5
22396.5
1855
18897.5
18897.5
Simplex
2242
22305.0
22397.0
1856
18898.0
18898.0
Simplex
2243
22305.5
22397.5
2244
22306.0
22398.0
2201
22284.5
22376.5
2245
22306.5
22398.5
2202
22285.0
22377.0
2246
22307.0
22399.0
2203
22285.5
22377.5
2247
22307.5
22399.5
2204
22286.0
22378.0
2248
22308.0
22400.0
2205
22286.5
22378.5
2249
22308.5
22400.5
2206
22287.0
22379.0
2250
22309.0
22401.0
2207
22287.5
22379.5
2251
22309.5
22401.5
2208
22288.0
22380.0
2252
22310.0
22402.0
2209
22288.5
22380.5
2253
22310.5
22402.5
2210
22289.0
22381.0
2254
22311.0
22403.0
2211
22289.5
22381.5
2255
22311.5
22403.5
2212
22290.0
22382.0
2256
22312.0
22404.0
11-19
Appendix
CH No.
Tx（ kHz） Rx（ kHz） Remarks
CH No.
Tx（ kHz） Rx（ kHz） Remarks
2257
22312.5
22404.5
22101
22334.5
22426.5
2258
22313.0
22405.0
22102
22335.0
22427.0
2259
22313.5
22405.5
22103
22335.5
22427.5
2260
22314.0
22406.0
22104
22336.0
22428.0
2261
22314.5
22406.5
22105
22336.5
22428.5
2262
22315.0
22407.0
22106
22337.0
22429.0
2263
22315.5
22407.5
22107
22337.5
22429.5
2264
22316.0
22408.0
22108
22338.0
22430.0
2265
22316.5
22408.5
22109
22338.5
22430.5
2266
22317.0
22409.0
22110
22339.0
22431.0
2267
22317.5
22409.5
22111
22339.5
22431.5
2268
22318.0
22410.0
22112
22340.0
22432.0
2269
22318.5
22410.5
22113
22340.5
22432.5
2270
22319.0
22411.0
22114
22341.0
22433.0
2271
22319.5
22411.5
22115
22341.5
22433.5
2272
22320.0
22412.0
22116
22342.0
22434.0
2273
22320.5
22412.5
22117
22342.5
22434.5
2274
22321.0
22413.0
22118
22343.0
22435.0
2275
22321.5
22413.5
22119
22343.5
22435.5
2276
22322.0
22414.0
22120
22344.0
22436.0
2277
22322.5
22414.5
22121
22344.5
22436.5
2278
22323.0
22415.0
22122
22345.0
22437.0
2279
22323.5
22415.5
22123
22345.5
22437.5
2280
22324.0
22416.0
22124
22346.0
22438.0
2281
22324.5
22416.5
22125
22346.5
22438.5
2282
22325.0
22417.0
22126
22347.0
22439.0
2283
22325.5
22417.5
22127
22347.5
22439.5
2284
22326.0
22418.0
22128
22348.0
22440.0
2285
22326.5
22418.5
22129
22348.5
22440.5
2286
22327.0
22419.0
22130
22349.0
22441.0
2287
22327.5
22419.5
22131
22349.5
22441.5
2288
22328.0
22420.0
22132
22350.0
22442.0
2289
22328.5
22420.5
22133
22350.5
22442.5
2290
22329.0
22421.0
22134
22351.0
22443.0
2291
22329.5
22421.5
22135
22351.5
22443.5
2292
22330.0
22422.0
22136
22352.0
22352.0
Simplex
2293
22330.5
22422.5
22137
22352.5
22352.5
Simplex
2294
22331.0
22423.0
22138
22353.0
22353.0
Simplex
2295
22331.5
22423.5
22139
22353.5
22353.5
Simplex
2296
22332.0
22424.0
22140
22354.0
22354.0
Simplex
2297
22332.5
22424.5
22141
22354.5
22354.5
Simplex
2298
22333.0
22425.0
22142
22355.0
22355.0
Simplex
2299
22333.5
22425.5
22143
22355.5
22355.5
Simplex
22100
22334.0
22426.0
22144
22356.0
22356.0
Simplex
11-20
Appendix
CH No.
Tx（ kHz） Rx（ kHz） Remarks
CH No.
Tx（ kHz） Rx（ kHz） Remarks
22145
22356.5
22356.5
Simplex
2508
25176.5
26104.5
22146
22357.0
22357.0
Simplex
2509
25177.0
26105.0
22147
22357.5
22357.5
Simplex
2510
25177.5
26105.5
22148
22358.0
22358.0
Simplex
2511
25178.0
26106.0
22149
22358.5
22358.5
Simplex
2512
25178.5
26106.5
22150
22359.0
22359.0
Simplex
2513
25179.0
26107.0
22151
22359.5
22359.5
Simplex
2514
25179.5
26107.5
22152
22360.0
22360.0
Simplex
2515
25180.0
26108.0
22153
22360.5
22360.5
Simplex
2516
25180.5
26108.5
22154
22361.0
22361.0
Simplex
2517
25181.0
26109.0
22155
22361.5
22361.5
Simplex
2518
25181.5
26109.5
22156
22362.0
22362.0
Simplex
2519
25182.0
26110.0
22157
22362.5
22362.5
Simplex
2520
25182.5
26110.5
22158
22363.0
22363.0
Simplex
2521
25183.0
26111.0
22159
22363.5
22363.5
Simplex
2522
25183.5
26111.5
22160
22364.0
22364.0
Simplex
2523
25184.0
26112.0
22161
22364.5
22364.5
Simplex
2524
25184.5
26112.5
22162
22365.0
22365.0
Simplex
2525
25185.0
26113.0
22163
22365.5
22365.5
Simplex
2526
25185.5
26113.5
22164
22366.0
22366.0
Simplex
2527
25186.0
26114.0
22165
22366.5
22366.5
Simplex
2528
25186.5
26114.5
22166
22367.0
22367.0
Simplex
2529
25187.0
26115.0
22167
22367.5
22367.5
Simplex
2530
25187.5
26115.5
22168
22368.0
22368.0
Simplex
2531
25188.0
26116.0
22169
22368.5
22368.5
Simplex
2532
25188.5
26116.5
22170
22369.0
22369.0
Simplex
2533
25189.0
26117.0
22171
22369.5
22369.5
Simplex
2534
25189.5
26117.5
22172
22370.0
22370.0
Simplex
2535
25190.0
26118.0
22173
22370.5
22370.5
Simplex
2536
25190.5
26118.5
22174
22371.0
22371.0
Simplex
2537
25191.0
26119.0
22175
22371.5
22371.5
Simplex
2538
25191.5
26119.5
22176
22372.0
22372.0
Simplex
2539
25192.0
26120.0
22177
22372.5
22372.5
Simplex
2540
25192.5
26120.5
22178
22373.0
22373.0
Simplex
2541
25193.0
25193.0
Simplex
22179
22373.5
22373.5
Simplex
2542
25193.5
25193.5
Simplex
22180
22374.0
22374.0
Simplex
2543
25194.0
25194.0
Simplex
2544
25194.5
25194.5
Simplex
2501
25173.0
26101.0
2545
25195.0
25195.0
Simplex
2502
25173.5
26101.5
2546
25195.5
25195.5
Simplex
2503
25174.0
26102.0
2547
25196.0
25196.0
Simplex
2504
25174.5
26102.5
2548
25196.5
25196.5
Simplex
2505
25175.0
26103.0
2549
25197.0
25197.0
Simplex
2506
25175.5
26103.5
2550
25197.5
25197.5
Simplex
2507
25176.0
26104.0
2551
25198.0
25198.0
Simplex
11-21
Appendix
CH No.
Tx（ kHz） Rx（ kHz） Remarks
CH No.
Tx（ kHz） Rx（ kHz） Remarks
2552
25198.5
25198.5
Simplex
2562
25203.5
25203.5
Simplex
2553
25199.0
25199.0
Simplex
2563
25204.0
25204.0
Simplex
2554
25199.5
25199.5
Simplex
2564
25204.5
25204.5
Simplex
2555
25200.0
25200.0
Simplex
2565
25205.0
25205.0
Simplex
2556
25200.5
25200.5
Simplex
2566
25205.5
25205.5
Simplex
2557
25201.0
25201.0
Simplex
2567
25206.0
25206.0
Simplex
2558
25201.5
25201.5
Simplex
2568
25206.5
25206.5
Simplex
2559
25202.0
25202.0
Simplex
2569
25207.0
25207.0
Simplex
2560
25202.5
25202.5
Simplex
2570
25207.5
25207.5
Simplex
2561
25203.0
25203.0
Simplex
2571
25208.0
25208.0
Simplex
*1) Used for distress and safety purposes.
11-22
Appendix
11.5 Guide to MF/HF operation
Be aware of the following points when using the MF/HF radio equipment.
z Frequencies available for communication are always changing.
z Not all frequency bandwidths can always be used for communication.
z After sending the DSC test call to a coast station, you will not always receive the
acknowledgement.
1. About the MF/HF radio equipment
Although for ship MF/HF radio equipment the 1.6 MHz to 27.5 MHz frequencies are
normally available, select an appropriate frequency from the frequencies assigned to
your ship for communication. As noted below, the use of the appropriate frequency
depends upon the radio wave propagation characteristics of the ionosphere.
Therefore, not all frequency bands are available for communication even if the
equipment is functioning properly.
2. Special characteristics of MF/HF radio wave propagation
As shown in the figure to the right, the
Ionosphere
F1/F2
layer
F 1/F2層
major MF/HF radio waves used for
電離層
communications are terrestrial waves
E層
Ionosphere
layer
(path 1) and waves reflected from the
電 離層
ionosphere (paths 2 and 3). You can
層
Ionosphere
DDlayer
communicate using waves reflected from
電離層
the ionosphere and the earth because
the effective communication range of
Station
Station
無線局 B
無線局 A
terrestrial waves is limited 6 .
The available range of frequencies for
Earth
地表
communication depends upon the radio
wave propagation characteristics of the
ionosphere. They will also change dramatically depending on the position and
distance from the station, the season, the time, and the sunspot number (approx. 0 to
250) which changes every 11 years 7 .
3. Selecting communication frequencies
MF/HF band communication frequencies cannot be predetermined. However, you can
select frequencies referring to previous communications logs, the frequency transition
table in this chapter under "Selecting communication frequencies in the MF/HF band
(reference)", and the radio wave propagation image.
4. About DSC testing
DSC operation is prescribed as an international standard 8 of the ITU and coast
stations that receive DSC test calls should acknowledge the calls. Responses may be
sent manually instead of automatically depending on the equipment at the coast
station. It may take longer than expected to receive the acknowledgement even if
your equipment is functioning properly and you have selected the proper
frequency.
You may experience skip zones where both terrestrial waves and waves reflected from the
ionosphere are unavailable at the end of the effective communication range of terrestrial
waves.
Radio wave propagation is affected by phasing, the Dellinger phenomenon, magnetic storms,
and atmospherics. Interference tends to be greater at night when radio waves can travel
greater distances.
ITU-R Recommendation M. 541
11-23
Appendix
Selecting communication frequencies in the MF/HF band (reference)
When communicating with the MF/HF radio equipment, select frequencies referring to the
frequency transition table and the radio wave propagation images (excluding the polar
latitudes) shown below 9 .
Example:
¾
When communicating with a station approximately 5000 km away at
around 12 pm in the winter with a sunspot number of 100, select
frequencies in the 18, 22, or 25 MHz bands for the best results.
Frequency transition table
通信条件
Transmissions
conditions
距離
Distance
遠距離
Long distances
(e.g. 5000 km)
（例：5000km）
季節と時刻
Season
& time
冬
Winter
夏
Summer
Winter
冬
Short
distances
近距離
（例：1000km）
(e.g. 1000 km)
¾
Summer
夏
Guideline
for selecting frequency
(for a sunspot
count of 100)
周波数選択の目安
（太陽の黒点数
= 100の場合）
2M
4M
6M
8M
12M
16M
18M
22M
日中
Day
夜間
Night
日中
Day
夜間
Night
Day
日中
Night
夜間
Day
日中
Night
夜間
Radio wave propagation images
These are based on the prediction of HF radio wave propagations. Communication is not
guaranteed.
11-24
25M
7ZPJD0604
电子信息产品有害物资申明
日本无线株式会社
Declaration on toxic & hazardous substances or elements
of Electronic Information Products
Japan Radio Company Limited
有毒有害物质或元素的名称及含量
(Names & Content of toxic and hazardous substances or elements）
形式名(Type): JSS-2250/2500
JSS 2250/2500
名称(Name): MF/HF Radio equipment
有毒有害物质或元素
(Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements)
部件名称
(Part name)
天线
((Antenna))
船内装置
(Inboard Unit)
外部设备(Peripherals)
・选择(Options)
・打印机(Printer)
・电线类(Cables)
・手册(Documennts)
铅
汞
镉
六价铬
多溴联苯
多溴二苯醚
(Pb)
(Hg)
(Cd)
(Cr6+)
(PBB)
(PBDE)
×
○
×
×
×
×
×
○
×
×
×
×
×
○
×
×
×
×
○：表示该有毒有害物质在该部件所有均质材料中的含量均在SJ/T11306-2006 标准规定的限量要求以下。
(Indicates that this toxic, or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the requirement in
SJ/T11363-2006.)
×：表示该有毒有害物质至少在该部件的某一均质材料中的含量超出SJ/T11363-2006 标准规定的限量要求。
(Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above
the limit requirement in SJ/T 11363-2006.)
RE: 中华人民共和国电子信息产品污染控制管理办法
Management Methods on Control of Pollution from Electronics Information Products of the People's Republic of China
－1/1－
Marking with market circulation mark
According to the requirements of clause 20 of Technical Regulations about safety of Maritime
transport objetcs, approved by Resolution of the Russian Federation Goverment #620 dated
August 12, 2010 and requirements Technical Regulation of the Russian Federation Goverment
#623 dated August 12, 2010 navigation & radiotelephone equipment should be marked by
company – manufacturer with market-circulation mark the way it is determined by Legislation of
the Russia federation on technical regulation.
According to the airticle 27 PZ No184 –FZ of Federal Law about Technical Regulation dated
December 12, 2002 and Resolution of the Russian Federation Goverment dated 19.11.03
No0696 navigation equipment has an appropriate marking. The marking can be perfomed by one
of four variants, depending on surface colour of equipment.
The images should be grey scale and should contrast against the surface colour (ref. to the
Resolution of the Russian Federation Goverment No696 <>
dated November 19, 2003).
The marking of Radio and navigational equipment should be done by the manufacturer (supplier)
according to the clause 2 of the article 27 of the Federal Law No.184 –FZ << About technical
Regulation>> and should be applied right to device surface.
- 1/1 -

---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-701
Modify Date                     : 2013:07:17 20:27:04+09:00
Create Date                     : 2013:07:16 12:06:51+09:00
Metadata Date                   : 2013:07:17 20:27:04+09:00
Creator Tool                    : PScript5.dll Version 5.2
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Microsoft Word - JSS-2250n2500AP取説E_0.doc
Creator                         : j08088
Document ID                     : uuid:3d18ec5e-8f4f-42a2-981d-2497a4a00998
Instance ID                     : uuid:7b3a91be-6085-4909-a330-064f871cdce4
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 7.0 (Windows)
Page Count                      : 196
Author                          : j08088

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools